JP6773705B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine capable of playing a game.

As a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something that can be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variable display (also referred to as “variation”) of the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display device, the gaming state (game). There is a machine (so-called pachinko machine) configured to give a predetermined game value to a player by changing the state of the machine (specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled).

Further, after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game on a predetermined game medium, the player operates the start lever to start variable display of the identification information by the variable display device, and the player changes each. By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display device, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the maximum delay time predetermined from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display devices is displayed. When a prize is generated according to the display result derived when the game is stopped, a predetermined game medium determined in advance is paid out according to the prize, and a specific prize is generated, the player sets the game state to the predetermined game value. There is something that is configured to give to (so-called slot machine).

The game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the game machine is in an advantageous state for the player who is likely to win a prize, or is in an advantageous state for the player. It is to generate rights and to be in a state where the conditions for paying out prize balls are easily satisfied.

In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) started in the variable display device based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. If it is done, a "big hit" will occur. The derived display is to finally stop and display the symbol (final stop symbol). When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening opens a predetermined number of times to shift to a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) is won in the large winning opening, the large winning opening is closed. The number of times the large winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the large winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each large winning opening may be referred to as a round. In addition, a game in a round may be called a round game.

Further, in the variable display device, symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left, middle, and right symbols) are stopped and shaken in a state of being consistent with a specific display result for a predetermined time. A big hit can occur before the final result is displayed due to movement, scaling or deformation, multiple symbols fluctuating synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols being swapped. The effect performed in the state where the sex continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as the reach state) is referred to as the reach effect. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes "off" and the variable display state ends. The player plays the game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

Some such game machines are configured to include a volume adjusting operation means for adjusting the volume and a brightness adjusting operating means for performing the brightness adjustment. For example, Patent Document 1 describes that the volume is adjusted by operating the cross direction controller to the left or right, and the brightness is adjusted by operating the cross direction controller in the upward or downward direction. Further, it is described that when an operation for adjusting the volume and an operation for adjusting the brightness are detected at the same time, both the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment cannot be controlled.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-147020

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when the operation by the volume adjusting operation means and the operation by the brightness adjusting operation means are performed, neither the volume or the brightness is adjusted, so that the effect is produced. There is a risk that the interest of the game cannot be improved due to the decrease in the value .

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game .

(Means A) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game and being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and is a volume adjusting operating means for adjusting the volume and for performing brightness adjustment. The adjusting means includes a brightness adjusting operating means, a processing for adjusting the volume based on the operation on the volume adjusting operating means, and an adjusting means capable of executing the processing for performing the brightness adjusting based on the operation on the brightness adjusting operating means. Priority is given to the process of lowering the volume when both the operation of lowering the volume by the volume adjusting operation means and the operation of increasing the brightness by the brightness adjusting operation means are performed, and further, the movement of the player can be detected. The effect executing means includes an effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect based on the detection result of the detection means, and an effect executing means capable of executing a promotion display for prompting the player's action. Based on the detection result of the detection means during execution, the promotion display can be terminated and the specific effect can be executed. As the specific effect, at least the first specific effect related to the first character and the first specific effect Is different, the second specific effect related to the second character can be executed, and as the promotion display, the first promotion display including the first suggestion display suggesting the first character and the second suggestion display suggesting the second character are performed. a second accelerator display including two suggestions display, it is possible to perform, as a pattern to perform a specific effect together ends the promotion display, perform the first accelerator displayed without performing a second accelerator display, the first a first pattern that performs the first specific effect thereby terminated -promoting display, perform the second accelerator display without executing the primary accelerator display, the second specific effect as well as terminating the second accelerator display and a second pattern to be executed, perform the first accelerator display without performing the second promotion display, and a third pattern to perform a second specific effect thereby terminating the first facilitate display, a first When the second specific effect is executed by the three patterns, the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is higher than when the second specific effect is executed by the second pattern. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
(Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and is a volume adjusting operating means for adjusting the volume (for example, an upward pressing operation unit 130a of a cross key 130 and a downward direction). Volume adjustment based on the operation unit 130b), the brightness adjustment operation means for adjusting the brightness (for example, the left direction pressing operation unit 130c and the right direction operation unit 130d of the cross key 130), and the volume adjustment operation means. The adjusting means includes an adjusting means (for example, a portion for executing step S800A in the effect control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the process of performing the brightness adjusting and the process of performing the brightness adjusting based on the operation of the brightness adjusting operating means. When an operation of lowering the volume by the volume adjusting operation means and an operation of increasing the brightness by the brightness adjusting operation means are performed, the process of lowering the volume is preferentially executed (for example, step S4009 in the effect control microcomputer 100). A part for executing S4010. Refer to the process of timing T1 shown in FIG. 20. Further, a detection means capable of detecting the movement of the player (for example, push sensor 9035B, controller sensor unit 9035A, etc.) and the movement of the player. A specific effect (for example, a character accessory effect) based on a promotion display execution means (for example, an image display device 905 capable of displaying a button image 90201 or a controller image 90203) capable of executing a prompt display and a detection result of the detection means. A specific effect executing means (for example, an effect control board 9012 or the like) capable of executing the specific effect (for example), and the specific effect executing means includes at least the first specific effect (for example, the first character accessory motion effect) and the first. It is possible to execute a second specific effect different from the first specific effect (for example, a second character accessory motion effect, etc.), and the promotion display executing means suggests that the first specific effect is executed as the promotion display. The first promotion display (for example, an effect in which the button image 90201 and the first character image 90211 are displayed on the image display device 905 as shown in FIG. 45 (C-2)) and the second specific effect are executed. It is possible to execute a second promotion display (for example, an effect in which the button image 90201 and the second character image 90212 are displayed on the image display device 905, as shown in FIG. 47 (C-3)). It is characterized by being. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered. In addition, it is possible to improve the interest of the game production.

(Means 2) Another aspect of the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, which is a volume adjusting operating means for adjusting the volume (for example, an upward pressing operation unit of the cross key 130). 130a and downward operation unit 130b), brightness adjustment operation means for performing brightness adjustment (for example, leftward pressing operation unit 130c and rightward operation unit 130d of the cross key 130), and volume adjustment operation means. It is provided with an adjusting means (for example, a portion for executing step S800A in the effect control microcomputer 100) capable of executing a process of adjusting the volume and a process of adjusting the brightness based on the operation of the brightness adjusting operating means. The adjusting means preferentially executes the process of lowering the brightness when the operation of lowering the brightness by the brightness adjusting operating means and the operation of raising the volume by the volume adjusting operating means are performed (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100). A portion for executing steps S4011 and S4012 in the above. Refer to the process of timing T2 shown in FIG. 20), a detection means capable of detecting the movement of the player (for example, push sensor 9035B, controller sensor unit 9035A, etc.), and a game. A specific effect (for example, an image display device 905 capable of displaying a button image 90201 or a controller image 90203) and a specific effect based on the detection result of the detection means (for example, an image display device 905 capable of displaying a promotion display for urging a person's action). A specific effect executing means (for example, an effect control board 9012, etc.) capable of executing a character character effect effect, etc.) is provided, and the specific effect executing means is at least a first specific effect (for example, a first character character character action effect, etc.). ) And the second specific effect different from the first specific effect (for example, the second character accessory motion effect, etc.), and the promotion display executing means executes the first specific effect as the promotion display. A first promotion display (for example, an effect in which the button image 90201 and the first character image 90211 are displayed on the image display device 905 as shown in FIG. 45 (C-2)) and the second identification. With the second promotion display suggesting that the effect is executed (for example, the effect in which the button image 90201 and the second character image 90212 are displayed on the image display device 905 as shown in FIG. 47 (C-3)). Is characterized by being feasible. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered. In addition, it is possible to improve the interest of the game production.

(Means 3) In the means 1 or the means 2, the adjusting means is either the volume or the brightness when the volume raising operation by the volume adjusting operation means and the brightness raising operation by the brightness adjusting operation means are performed. Priority is given to the process of raising one of them (for example, when the brightness up operation and the volume up operation are performed at the same time as shown in the modification A, one of the volume and the brightness is predetermined. It may be configured to give priority to the other one and raise the setting level). According to such a configuration, the volume and the brightness can be preferably adjusted.

(Means 4) In any of the means 1 to the means 3, the adjusting means has a volume and a brightness when the volume adjusting operation means reduces the volume and the brightness adjusting operation means reduces the brightness. Priority is given to the process of lowering either one of the above (for example, as shown in the modified example B, when the brightness down operation and the volume down operation are performed at the same time, either the volume or the brightness is executed. It may be configured to give priority to one of the predetermined ones and lower the setting level). According to such a configuration, the volume and the brightness can be preferably adjusted.

(Means 5) In the means 1 or the means 2, when the volume adjusting operation means increases the volume and the brightness adjusting operation means increases the brightness, the adjusting means is a production stage of the volume and the brightness. Is configured to give priority to the process of raising the lower value (for example, the portion where steps S4013 to S4016 in the effect control microcomputer 100 are executed. See the processes of timings T3 and T4 shown in FIG. 20). May be good. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered.

(Means 6) In any one of means 1, means 2 or means 5, when the adjusting means performs an operation of lowering the volume by the volume adjusting operating means and an operation of lowering the brightness by the brightness adjusting operating means, the adjusting means is performed. The process of lowering the higher of the volume and the brightness is preferentially executed (for example, the portion where steps S4017 to S4019 in the effect control microcomputer 100 are executed. Refer to the processes of timings T5 and T6 shown in FIG. 20. .) May be configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered.

(Means 7) In any of the means 1 to the means 6, the adjusting means is executed before the operation is performed when the operation by the volume adjusting operating means and the operation by the brightness adjusting operating means are performed. Priority is given to the process of adjusting either the volume or the brightness based on the effect (for example, steps S4005 to S4008 in the effect control microcomputer 100 are executed, and the dialogue notice effect is executed immediately before. If this is done, the volume adjustment may be prioritized and executed, and if the flash advance notice effect is executed immediately before, the brightness adjustment may be preferentially executed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered.

(Means 8) A detection means (for example, a first push button and a second push button in the second embodiment) capable of detecting a player's movement in any of means 1 to 7 and a detection means. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a part where the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is updated toward the final mode) based on the detection of a predetermined motion (for example, repeated hits) performed by the player a plurality of times. The detection means includes the specific effect execution means (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 101 in the second embodiment executes the advance notice effect process and the processing during the big hit game), and the detection means is the first detection means (for example, the second detection means). The specific effect executing means includes a first push button in the embodiment) and a second detecting means different from the first detecting means (for example, a second push button in the second embodiment), and the specific effect executing means is a player. It is possible to execute the specific effect by assuming that the predetermined operation has been executed based on the specific operation (for example, long press) different from the predetermined operation according to (for example, the effect control CPU 101 in the second embodiment gives a notice. A predetermined operation is detected by both the first detection means and the second detection means), which executes the effect processing and the processing during the big hit game and updates the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits toward the final mode by automatic continuous hitting. In this case, it is possible to execute the specific effect more than when the predetermined operation is detected by only one of the first detection means and the second detection means (for example, the effect control CPU 101 is in S361 of the advance notice effect process). The part where the value of the continuous hit count counter is incremented by 1 depending on whether the first push button is operated and the second push button is determined in S368, or the first push button in S441 of the jackpot game processing. A specific operation is detected by both the first detection means and the second detection means) in the case where it is determined that there is an operation and the case where it is determined in S448 that the second push button is operated). If (for example, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the first push button long press determination flag and the second push button long press determination flag are set in S373 of the advance notice effect process or S453 of the jackpot process. In this case, the specific effect can be executed with the same speed as when the specific operation is detected by only one of the first detection means and the second detection means (for example, the effect control CPU 101 performs the advance notice effect process). In S373 and S453 of the jackpot game processing, the first push button long press determination flag And when it is determined that the second push button long press determination flag is set, and in S374 of the advance notice effect processing and S454 of the jackpot game processing, it is determined that the first push button long press determination flag is set. In that case, when it is determined that the second push button long press determination flag is set in S375 of the advance notice effect processing and S455 of the big hit game processing, the value of the auto repeated hit count counter is incremented by +1). It may be configured. According to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

(Means 9) A detection means (for example, a first push button and a second push button in the second embodiment) capable of detecting the movement of a player in any one of the means 1 to the means 8 and a detection means. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a part where the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is updated toward the final mode) based on the detection of a predetermined motion (for example, repeated hits) performed by the player a plurality of times. The detection means includes the specific effect execution means (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 101 in the second embodiment executes the advance notice effect process and the process during the big hit game), and the detection means is the first detection means (for example, the second detection means). The specific effect executing means includes a first push button in the embodiment) and a second detecting means different from the first detecting means (for example, a second push button in the second embodiment), and the specific effect executing means is a player. It is possible to execute the specific effect on the assumption that the predetermined operation is executed based on the specific operation (for example, long press) different from the predetermined operation according to (for example, the effect control CPU 101 in the second embodiment gives a notice. (A part where the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is updated toward the final mode by executing the effect processing and the processing during the big hit game), when the specific operation is detected by the first detection means and specified by the second detection means It is possible to execute a specific effect with the same speed as when the motion is detected (for example, when the player presses and holds the first push button and the second push button is pressed as shown in FIG. 27B). In both cases, the long-press determination period is the same 0.2 seconds, so the display mode of the meter for repeated hits can be updated toward the final mode at the same speed). You may. According to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

(Means 10) A detection means (for example, a first push button and a second push button in the second embodiment) capable of detecting the movement of a player in any one of the means 1 to the means 9 and a detection means. Based on the fact that the player's movement is detected over a predetermined period (for example, 0.2 seconds, which is the long press determination interval), the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is updated toward the final mode. The detection means includes a specific effect executing means (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 101 in the second embodiment executes a notice effect process and a jackpot game in-game process), and the detection means is the first detection. Specific means including means (for example, the first push button in the second embodiment) and a second detection means different from the first detection means (for example, the second push button in the second embodiment). In the effect executing means, after the operation is detected in one of the first detecting means and the second detecting means for a first period (for example, 0.15 seconds) shorter than a predetermined period, the other is used for a predetermined period. When the motion is detected over a shorter second period (for example, 0.05 seconds), the specific effect is not executed even if the total of the first period and the second period is equal to or longer than the predetermined period (for example, a game). When a person presses and holds the first push button for 0.15 seconds and then presses and holds the second push button for 0.05 seconds, the sum of the first period and the second period is the long press determination interval. It may be configured so that the update of the meter corresponding to repeated hits by automatic repeated hits is not executed even though it is 0.2 seconds). According to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

(Means 11) A detection means (for example, a first push button and a second push button in the second embodiment) capable of detecting the movement of a player in any one of the means 1 to the means 10 and a detection means. Based on the fact that the player's movement is detected over a predetermined period (for example, 0.2 seconds, which is the long press determination interval), the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is updated toward the final mode. A specific effect executing means (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 101 in the second embodiment executes a notice effect process or a jackpot game in-game process) is provided, and the detection means is the first detection unit. Specific means including means (for example, the first push button in the second embodiment) and a second detection means different from the first detection means (for example, the second push button in the second embodiment). After the operation is detected in one of the first detecting means and the second detecting means for a first period (for example, 0.15 seconds) shorter than a predetermined period, the effect executing means has a predetermined period in the other. When the motion is detected over a shorter second period (for example, 0.05 seconds), the specific effect can be executed when the sum of the first period and the second period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (for example). , When the player presses and holds the first push button for 0.15 seconds and then presses and holds the second push button for 0.05 seconds, the total of the first period and the second period is the long press determination interval. It may be configured such that the update of the meter corresponding to repeated hits by automatic repeated hits is executed based on 0.2 seconds. According to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

(Means 12) A detection means (for example, a first push button and a second push button in the second embodiment) capable of detecting the movement of a player in any one of the means 1 to the means 11 and a detection means. As the effect related to the effect, at least the first effect (for example, displaying an image of a push button) and the second effect (for example, displaying a message prompting the operation of a push button) can be executed (for example, a second embodiment). The effect control CPU 101 in the above includes a notice effect process and a portion that executes a big hit game process), and the detection means includes a first detection means (for example, a first push button in the second embodiment) and the first push button. The effect executing means executes the first effect and the second effect as the effect related to the first detection means, including a second detection means (for example, a second push button in the second embodiment) different from the first detection means. It is possible (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 101 executes an image display of the first push button and a display of a message prompting the operation of the first push button), and the first effect and the second effect are as effects related to the second detection means. (For example, the portion where the effect control CPU 101 executes the image display of the second push button and the display of the message prompting the operation of the second push button), and the first effect relating to the first detection means is the second. The effect intensity is stronger than the first effect related to the detection means (for example, the portion where the image of the first push button is displayed but the image of the second push button is not displayed), and the second effect related to the first detection means is the second effect. 2 The effect is stronger than the second effect related to the detection means (for example, a part that displays a message prompting the operation of the first push button but does not display a message prompting the operation of the second push button). It may have been done. According to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions according to the following (means 13) to (means 21). Conventionally, in a game machine, in order to encourage a button operation as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-158842, a promotion display for displaying a button image or the like is performed, and when the button operation is performed according to the promotion display, In some cases, either production A (CHANGE) or production B (hot) is displayed. However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine does not even suggest that a specific effect is performed in the promotion display. For this reason, the interest was insufficient. In view of this point, it is required to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game production.

(Means 13) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901 or the like), and is a detecting means capable of detecting the movement of the player. (For example, push sensor 9035B, controller sensor unit 9035A, etc.) and promotion display executing means (for example, an image display device 905 capable of displaying button image 90201 or controller image 90203) that can execute promotion display that encourages the player's movement. ), And a specific effect executing means (for example, an effect control board 9012) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a character character effect effect) based on the detection result of the detection means. Can execute at least the first specific effect (for example, the first character accessory motion effect) and the second specific effect different from the first specific effect (for example, the second character accessory motion effect). As the promotion display, the promotion display execution means has a button on the image display device 905, as shown in FIG. 45 (C-2), which suggests that the first specific effect is executed. An image (for example, an effect in which the image 90201 and the first character image 90211 are displayed) and a second promotion display (for example, FIG. 47 (C-3)) suggesting that the second specific effect is executed. It is characterized in that the button image 90201 and the second character image 90212 are displayed on the display device 905).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game production.

(Means 14) In the means 13, the specific effect executing means can execute a third specific effect (for example, a third character accessory motion effect) different from the first specific effect and the second specific effect, and promotes the effect. The display executing means includes a button image 90201 and an validity period bar 90202 on the image display device 905 as shown in the third promotion display (for example, as shown in FIG. 47 (C-4)) suggesting that the third specific effect is executed. In addition to being displayed, the effect of displaying the third character image 90213, etc.) may be executed.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game production.

(Means 15) In the means 13 or the means 14, the specific effect executing means first performs the first specific effect as a first effect mode (for example, the first character accessory 9061 is the first character accessory operation effect. A mode of moving from the character character first position P9011 to the first character character second position P9012 and a second effect mode different from the first effect mode (for example, the first character character 9061 is the first character). As the accessory rotation effect, it can be executed by rotating (rotating) at the second position P9012 of the first character accessory), and the promotion display executing means executes the first specific effect of the first effect mode. At that time, the first promotion display may be executed (for example, the first character image 90211 can be displayed when the first character accessory motion effect is executed).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game production.

(Means 16) In any one of means 13 to means 15, the detection means can detect an operation on a player's operation means (for example, push button 9031B, stick controller 9031A, etc.), and the first promotion The display and the second promotion display are displays prompting the player to operate one operating means (for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (B-1) with respect to the image display device 905, a button image. 90201 may be displayed, or the controller image 90203 may be displayed as shown in FIG. 48 (B-2)).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game production.

(Means 17) In any of the means 13 to the means 16, the promotion display executing means does not execute the second promotion display when the first specific effect is executed (for example, the first character combination). The image display device 905 may not display the second character image 90212, etc.) when the first character accessory effect in which the object 9061 operates is executed.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the effect.

(Means 18) In any of the means 13 to the means 17, a period display (for example, a valid period bar or the like) for notifying an operation valid period (for example, a period during which the effect control board 9012 accepts an operation of the push button 9031B). The period display execution means (for example, an image display device 905 capable of displaying the validity period bar 90202) is further provided, and the display mode of the period display is the first promotion display and the second promotion display. Different (eg, as shown in FIG. 45 (C-2), the validity period bar 90202 displayed with the first character image 90211 is green, and as shown in FIG. 47 (C-3), the second character image. The validity period bar 90202 displayed together with 90212 may be red, etc.).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game production.

(Means 19) In any one of means 13 to 18, the specific effect executing means includes the first specific effect related to the first character among a plurality of types of characters and the specific effect among the plurality of types of characters. The second specific effect related to the second character can be executed (for example, the first character accessory motion effect and the second character accessory motion effect can be executed), and the promotion display executing means is the said. The first promotion display related to the first character and the second promotion display related to the second character can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 45 (C-2), the button image 90201 and the first character image 90211 Is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 47 (C-3), the effect of displaying the button image 90201 and the second character image 90212 is feasible, etc.).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game production.

(Means 20) In any one of the means 13 to the means 19, the promotion display executing means does not suggest that either the first specific effect or the second specific effect is executed. The display (for example, the image in the normal reach state shown in FIG. 45B is displayed on the image display device 905, and subsequently the button image 90201 and the controller image 90203 are not displayed, etc.) can be executed, and the specific effect execution can be executed. After the normal promotion display is displayed, the means can execute the first specific effect or the second specific effect (for example, an image in the normal reach state shown in FIG. 45B is displayed on the image display device 905. The first character accessory 9061 is displayed, and subsequently, as shown in FIG. 46 (D-2), the first character accessory 9061 is displayed from the first character accessory first position P9011 without displaying the button image 90201 or the controller image 90203. The first character accessory motion effect that moves to the first character accessory second position P9012 may be executed).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game production.

(Means 21) Further, a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901 or the like) and a detecting means capable of detecting a player's movement (for example, a push sensor 9035B, a controller sensor unit 9035A or the like). ), And a specific display executing means (for example, an image display device 905, etc.) that performs a specific display (for example, a button image 90201, a controller image 90203, etc.) corresponding to the detecting means. As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, button image 90201 or the like) and a second specific display (for example, controller image 90203 or the like) that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific display can be displayed. During the non-valid period of detection by the detection means (for example, a period before the period in which the operation of the push button 9031B is accepted by the effect control board 9012, etc.), the first specific display is displayed and then the first specific display is displayed. During the valid period of detection by the detection means (for example, the period during which the operation of the push button 9031B is accepted by the effect control board 9012) by changing to the second specific display (for example, changing the button image 90201 to the controller image 90203). The gaming machine may be characterized in that an operation effect using the second specific display after the change (for example, an effect of displaying the controller image 90203 and then notifying the jackpot result) is executed.

According to the above configuration, the effect of production is improved.

It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of the game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit composition example of an effect control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the cross key. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the CPU in the main board. It is a flowchart which shows the 4ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of the command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern command reception waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol variation start processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the advance notice production decision table. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during change of an effect symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the luminance volume setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the luminance volume setting process. It is a timing chart for demonstrating a specific example of brightness adjustment and volume adjustment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advance notice effect processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advance notice effect processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advance notice effect processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a big hit game in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a big hit game in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a big hit game in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the difference between the push button operation in the advance notice effect and the notification effect, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the long press performance of each push button. (A) is an explanatory diagram when only the first push button is repeatedly hit in the notice effect, (B) is an explanatory diagram when only the second push button is repeatedly hit in the notice effect, and (C) is a notice. It is explanatory drawing when the 1st push button and the 2nd push button are repeatedly hit in the production. (A) is an explanatory diagram when only the first push button is long-pressed in the advance notice effect, and (B) is an explanatory diagram when only the second push button is long-pressed in the advance notice effect. (A) is an explanatory diagram when the first push button and the second push button are pressed and held at the same time in the advance notice effect, and (B) is the second push after the first push button is long pressed in the advance notice effect. It is explanatory drawing when the button is pressed and held. (A) is an explanatory diagram when only the first push button is repeatedly hit in the notification effect, (B) is an explanatory diagram when only the second push button is repeatedly hit in the notification effect, and (C) is an explanatory diagram when only the second push button is repeatedly hit. It is explanatory drawing when the 1st push button and the 2nd push button are repeatedly hit in the production. (A) is an explanatory diagram when only the first push button is long-pressed in the notification effect, and (B) is an explanatory diagram when only the second push button is long-pressed in the notification effect. (A) is an explanatory diagram when the first push button and the second push button are pressed and held at the same time in the notification effect, and (B) is the second push after the first push button is pressed and held in the notification effect. It is explanatory drawing when the button is pressed and held. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination example of the special figure display result and the like. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination example of the fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the character character production production determination processing. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a character character character effect effect determination table during super reach development, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a button image display determination table during super reach development, and (C) is an explanatory diagram. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the image display determination table at the time of big hit result notification. It is explanatory drawing explaining the flow of the character character character production at the time of super reach development. It is explanatory drawing explaining the flow of the character character character production following FIG. 45. It is explanatory drawing explaining another example of the flow of the character character character production at the time of super reach development. It is explanatory drawing explaining the flow of the character character character production at the time of a big hit result notification. It is explanatory drawing explaining another example of FIG. 48.

Embodiment 1.
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the front.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is composed of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame that is openably and closably attached to the inside of the outer frame. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape provided in the gaming frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (game described later). It is a structure including (excluding board 6).

On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 3. At the lower part of the hitting ball supply plate 3, a surplus ball receiving plate 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 3 and a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball are provided. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-shaped body constituting the game board 6 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, a game area 7 in which the driven game ball can flow down is formed.

An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 has an effect symbol display area for variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of the effect symbol. In the effect symbol display area, for example, there is a symbol display area for variably displaying three decorative (effect) effect symbols of "left", "middle", and "right". The symbol display area has "left", "middle", and "right" symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. The three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the effect control microcomputer is executing the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a, the effect display device 9 executes the effect display in accordance with the variable display, and the second special When the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 in accordance with the variable display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game. ..

Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol). It is stopped, rocked, scaled or deformed while matching the combination of symbols), or multiple symbols are synchronized and fluctuated with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols are swapped. The effect performed in a state where the possibility of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as a reach effect. Therefore, it can be said that the reach production is a production suggesting that it will be a big hit. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, if the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes "missing" and the variable display state ends. The player plays the game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In the upper right portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9, fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying the fourth symbol following the effect symbol and the special symbol and the ordinary symbol described later are provided. In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol and the second symbol display area 9c for which the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol described later. A fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol is provided, in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

In this embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (however, to be exact, the variation display of the effect symbol varies on the effect control microcomputer 100 side. It is performed by measuring the fluctuation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing the production using the effect display device 9, for example, the effect content including the variation display of the effect symbol disappears from the screen for a moment. The mode of production is diversifying, such as the production of production and the production of movable objects blocking all or part of the screen. Therefore, even when looking at the display screen on the effect display device 9, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the variable display is currently being performed. Therefore, in this embodiment, is it currently in the state of being in the variable display by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further performing the variable display of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Whether or not it can be reliably recognized. It should be noted that the fourth symbol is always displayed in a variable manner with a constant operation, and is not erased from the screen or shielded by a shield, so that it can always be visually recognized.

The 4th symbol for the 1st special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 9c and the 2nd special for the 1st special symbol. The fourth symbol display area 9d for a symbol may be collectively referred to as a fourth symbol display area.

The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state in which the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined display color (for example, blue) at regular time intervals. .. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol are synchronized with each other. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol are synchronized with each other. Note that "variable display is synchronized" means that the start time and end time of the variable display are the same, and the period of the variable display is the same. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the display color reminiscent of the jackpot in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (display color different from the missed, for example, the missed). Sometimes it is displayed in blue, but when it is a big hit, it is displayed in red. Note that the display color may be different depending on the type of big hit (normally big hit or probabilistic big hit). It remains lit. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the display color reminiscent of the jackpot in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol (display color different from the missed one). For example, it is displayed in blue when it is out of the way, but it is displayed in red when it is a big hit. Note that the display color is different depending on the type of big hit (normal big hit or probabilistic big hit). The display color of the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d when the lights are turned off is assimilated with the background image and disappears when the lights are turned off. It is desirable that the display color is different from the image (for example, black).

In this embodiment, the case where the fourth symbol display area is provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown, but a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED is used separately from the effect display device 9. The fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the fluctuation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately lit, and any of the two LEDs is stopped. Depending on whether it is displayed or not, it may be indicated whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol correspond to each other and separate fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Further, a fourth symbol display area common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be realized by using a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED. In this case, when the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol, and when the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol. For example, the variable display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display in which different display colors are repeatedly turned on and off at regular time intervals. Further, when the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol, and when the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol, for example. , The variable display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by displaying the lights and turns off repeatedly at different time intervals. Further, for example, the same jackpot symbol is used when the stop symbol is derived and displayed in response to the variation display of the first special symbol and when the stop symbol is derived and displayed in response to the variation display of the second special symbol. However, the stop symbol of a different mode may be stopped and displayed.

On the left side of the lower part of the game board 6, a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the lower right side of the game board 6, a second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. Further, in this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display, for example, a number (or a two-digit symbol) from 00 to 99, respectively.

Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol display (variable display unit). I have something to do.

In this embodiment, the case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided is shown, but the gaming machine may include only one special symbol indicator.

In the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the execution condition of the variable display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening). After passing through 14 (including winning), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed). It is started based on the establishment of a state (a state in which the jackpot game is not executed), and when the variable display time (variable time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. In addition, the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a pre-determined area such as a winning opening or a gate as a winning area, and a concept including that the game ball has entered (winned) in the winning opening. Is. Further, the derivation display of the display result means that the symbol (example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed.

Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a.

Further, below the winning device having the first starting winning opening (first starting opening) 13, a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 capable of winning a game ball is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second starting opening) 14 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is opened, the game ball can win the second starting winning opening 14 (it becomes easier to win the starting winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball is more likely to win in the second starting winning opening 14 than in the first starting winning opening 13. Further, in the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is closed, the game ball does not win the second starting winning opening 14. Therefore, in the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is closed, the game ball is more likely to win the first starting winning opening 13 than the second starting winning opening 14. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is closed, it may be difficult to win a prize, but it may be possible to win a prize (that is, it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize).

Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is extremely easy to win in the second starting winning opening 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly below the effect display device 9, but the distance between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first starting winning opening 13 may be further narrowed, or the first starting winning opening may be further narrowed. The winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is made by arranging the nails densely around 13 or making it difficult to guide the game ball to the first starting winning opening 13 by arranging the nails around the first starting winning opening 13. May be set to be higher than the winning rate of the first starting winning opening 13.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, a variable winning ball device 15 that opens and closes only the second starting winning opening 14 is provided, but the first starting winning opening 13 and the second A variable winning ball device that opens and closes each of the starting winning openings 14 may be provided.

On the side of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the number of first holding storages (holding memory is also referred to as starting memory or starting winning memory) is displayed. A first special symbol hold storage display 18a composed of four displays is provided. The first special symbol hold storage display 18a increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

On the side of the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold storage display 18b consisting of four indicators for displaying the number of valid winning balls entered in the second start winning opening 14, that is, the number of second hold storages. Is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 18b increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, a first hold storage display unit 9a for displaying the first hold storage number and a second hold storage display unit 9b for displaying the second hold storage number are provided. ing. The first hold storage display unit 9a displays the first hold display corresponding to each of the first hold storage. Further, the second hold storage display unit 9b displays the second hold display corresponding to each of the second hold storages. In this embodiment, the case where the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number are displayed individually is shown, but the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is added. A total hold storage display unit for displaying the number of hold storages may be provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that do not satisfy the variable display start condition. Further, in such a configuration, in the total hold storage display unit, the first hold memory and the second hold memory are displayed side by side in the order of winning the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. , The first hold memory or the second hold memory is displayed in a recognizable manner (for example, the first hold memory is displayed in red and the second hold memory is displayed in blue). It may be configured.

The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. Variable display of the production symbol as the symbol of. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized with each other. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized with each other. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect symbol reminiscent of the jackpot on the effect display device 9. The combination of is stopped and displayed.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, the game control microcomputer 560 that controls the variation display of the special symbol transmits a variation pattern command that can specify the variation time, and the effect control microcomputer 100 transmits the variation pattern command. The variation display of the effect symbol is controlled according to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command. Therefore, since the fluctuation time is specified based on the fluctuation pattern command, the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the fluctuation display of the effect symbol should be executed synchronously in principle. However, in the unlikely event that the fluctuation pattern command data is garbled, the fluctuation time recognized by the game control microcomputer 560 and the fluctuation time recognized by the effect control microcomputer 100 There may be a gap between them. Therefore, in the event of an unexpected situation such as garbled command data, there is a possibility that the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol may not be completely synchronized.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball device 20 is provided with an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. In the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when is derived and displayed, the opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 21, so that the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the big prize opening is detected by the count switch 23.

The game area 6 is also provided with winning openings (ordinary winning openings) 29, 30, 33, 39 for paying out a predetermined number of prize game balls determined in advance based on the winning of the game balls. The game balls that have won the winning openings 29, 30, 33, 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a.

A normal symbol display 10 is provided on the right side of the game board 6. The ordinary symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, "○" and "x") called ordinary symbols.

When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, the variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbol becomes visible when lit). For example, if the lower lamp lights at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. .. Then, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 is a state in which the player is advantageous from a disadvantageous state to an advantageous state (a state in which the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 14) when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol. Changes to. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Every time the game ball passes through the gate 32, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage display 41 increases the number of lit LEDs by one. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of lit LEDs is reduced by 1. Further, a probabilistic state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit is higher than that in the normal state (a state in which the probability of being judged as a big hit as a result of the fluctuation display of a special symbol is increased as compared with the normal state. In the high probability state.), The probability that the stopped symbol on the normal symbol display 10 becomes a hit symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

Decorative LEDs 25 that blink during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, and an out port 26 that captures a hit ball that has not won a prize is provided at the lower part. Further, two speakers 27 for producing sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right outside the game area 7. A frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 7.

In the members constituting the hitting ball supply plate 3, an operation button 120 as an operation means that can be operated by the player is provided on the hitting ball supply plate 3. The operation button 120 is provided with a push button switch that allows the player to perform a pressing operation. The operation button 120 may be configured not only to be provided with a push button switch capable of being pressed by the player, but also to be provided with a dial capable of being rotated by the player. With such a configuration, the player can make a predetermined selection (for example, selection of an effect) by rotating the dial.

Further, on the left side of the operation button 120 on the ball hitting plate 3, a cross key 130 is also provided as an operation means that can be operated by the player. The cross key 130 is provided with push button switches that allow the player to perform pressing operations in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.

The game machine is a ball launching device (not shown) that drives a drive motor in response to the player operating the ball striking handle 5 and launches the game ball into the game area 7 by using the rotational force of the drive motor. ) Is provided. The game ball launched from the hit ball launcher enters the game area 7 through a hit ball rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends from the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends and the first 1), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 13. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first reserved storage number is incremented by 1 on condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends and the second special symbol is displayed. 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts the variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second starting winning opening 14. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second reserved storage number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

In this embodiment, when a probabilistic jackpot occurs, the game is shifted to the so-called probabilistic state after the jackpot game is completed, the game state is shifted to the high probability state, and the game ball is easily started and won a prize (that is, a special symbol). The game shifts to a high base state, which is a game state controlled so that the execution conditions of the variable display on the displays 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 are easily satisfied). In the high base state, for example, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is increased, or the time during which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is extended as compared with the case where the high base state is not achieved. It becomes easier to win a starting prize.

It should be noted that, instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (also referred to as an open extension state), the state shifts to a normal symbol probability variation state in which the probability that the stopped symbol on the normal symbol display 10 becomes a hit symbol is increased. By doing so, it may shift to a high base state. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In this case, by controlling the transition to the normal symbol probability variation state, the probability that the stopped symbol on the normal symbol display 10 becomes a hit symbol is increased, and the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened increases. Therefore, if the state shifts to the normal symbol probability variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and the starting winning state becomes easy (high base state). That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is the hit symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is the probabilistic symbol, which is disadvantageous to the player. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

Further, the normal symbol display 10 may shift to the high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time saving state in which the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol is shortened. In the normal symbol time reduction state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, as the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases, the frequency of opening the variable winning ball device 15 increases, and the start winning is easy to win (high base state).

Further, in this embodiment, when the state is shifted to the high base state, it is also shifted to the time saving state (special symbol time saving state) in which the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shortened. By shifting to the time saving state in this way, the fluctuation time of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shortened, so that the fluctuation of the special symbol or the effect symbol is started more frequently (in other words, the digestion of the reserved memory is completed. It will be faster.) It is possible to reduce the situation where an invalid start prize is generated. Therefore, a valid start winning prize is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility that a big hit game is performed increases.

Furthermore, by shifting to all the states shown above (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time reduction state and special symbol time reduction state), it becomes easier to win a starting prize (shift to a high base state). You may. In addition, by shifting to any one or more of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time reduction state, and special symbol time reduction state), it becomes easier to win a start prize (high base). It may be changed to the state). In addition, by shifting to only one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time reduction state, and special symbol time reduction state), it becomes easier to win a start prize (high). It may move to the base state).

FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on the main board (game control board) 31. Note that FIG. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 that controls the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built into the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer may have at least a CPU 56 and a RAM 55 built-in, and the ROM 54 may be externally attached or built-in. Further, the I / O port portion 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 also includes a random number circuit 53 that generates a hardware random number (a random number generated by the hardware circuit).

Further, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means in which a part or all thereof is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply board 910. That is, even if the power supply to the game machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (special symbol process flag, etc.) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up by the power supply.

Since the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 54, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) will execute (or process) the following. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. This also applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

The random number circuit 53 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 53 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and the start is generated at a random timing. It has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random number value based on the time when the winning is the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data.

The random number circuit 53 has a numerical data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), a numerical data update rule selection setting function, and a numerical data update rule selection function. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random number can be improved.

Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 53. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as ROM 54 (an ID number assigned by a different numerical value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained above is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 53. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 53 can be further improved.

Further, an input driver circuit 58 that gives detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 13a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. There is. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 that drives a solenoid 16 that opens and closes the variable winning ball device 15 and a solenoid 21 that opens and closes the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a large winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 560. It is mounted on 31.

Further, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a for variably displaying a special symbol, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying a normal symbol, and a first special symbol hold memory. The display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol holding storage display 18b, and the normal symbol holding storage display 41 is performed.

An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

In this embodiment, the effect control means (consisting of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect content from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. It receives the effect control command and controls the display of the effect display device 9 that variably displays the effect symbol.

Further, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the decorative LED 25 provided on the game board and the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35. , The sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled via the audio output board 70.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 may not be provided, and only the effect control board 80 may be provided for the effect control.

The effect control board 80 is equipped with an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to the effect such as an effect symbol process flag. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and a capture signal (capture signal) from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 (not shown). The effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103 in response to the effect control INT signal). Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to control the display of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

In this embodiment, the VDP 109 that controls the display of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 100, and VRAM is mapped there. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

The effect control CPU 101 outputs a command for reading necessary data from the CGROM (not shown) to the VDP 109 according to the received effect control command. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, people, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect patterns), and background image data. ROM for. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CG ROM in response to a command from the effect control CPU 101. Then, the VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulatory means.

As a signal direction regulating means, the relay board 77 allows the signal input from the main board 31 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal does not pass in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 of the above is mounted. As a unidirectional circuit, for example, a diode or a transistor is used. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. Further, a unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is regulated. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (on the side of the game control microcomputer 560). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port portion 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit, which is a unidirectional circuit, may be further provided on the outside of the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs a signal from the operation button 120 in response to a pressing operation of the operation button 120 by the player via the input port 107.

Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs a signal from the cross key 130 in response to a pressing operation of the cross key 130 in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction by the player via the input port 107.

Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED or the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

In the lamp driver board 35, the signal for driving the LED or the lamp is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on the signal for driving the LED. Further, a current is supplied to a decorative LED 25 or the like provided on the game board side.

In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesis IC 703 generates voices and sound effects according to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs a voice signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data according to the sound number data. The control data according to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined period (for example, the fluctuation period of the effect symbol) in chronological order.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the cross key 130. As shown in FIG. 4, the cross key 130 includes an upward pressing operation unit 130a (a pressing operation unit on the back side when viewed from a player sitting facing the pachinko gaming machine 1) and a downward pressing operation unit 130b. (Pressing operation unit on the front side when viewed from the player sitting facing the pachinko game machine 1) and left direction operation unit 130c (on the left side when viewed from the player sitting facing the pachinko game machine 1) A pressing operation unit) and a right-direction operation unit 130d (a pressing operation unit on the right side when viewed from a player sitting facing the pachinko gaming machine 1) are provided. Then, the cross key 130 outputs a detection signal corresponding to the upward operation when the upward pressing operation unit 130a is pressed, and responds to the downward operation when the downward pressing operation unit 130b is pressed. When the leftward pressing operation unit 130c is pressed, the detection signal corresponding to the leftward operation is output, and when the rightward pressing operation unit 130d is pressed, the rightward operation is performed. Output the detection signal.

In this embodiment, expressions such as an upward operation and a downward operation of the cross key 130 are used, but specifically, from the viewpoint of the player sitting facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. The upward pressing operation unit 130a provided on the back side is pressed, or the downward pressing operation unit 130a provided on the front side when viewed from the player sitting facing the pachinko gaming machine 1 is pressed. To do.

In this embodiment, it is possible to adjust the brightness of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and the volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 by operating the cross key 130. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the volume can be adjusted by using the upward pressing operation unit 130a and the downward pressing operation unit 130b of the cross key 130, and the upward pressing operation unit 130a can be used. When the pressing operation is performed, the volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 can be increased, and when the downward pressing operation unit 130b is pressed, the volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 can be decreased. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, it is possible to adjust the brightness by using the leftward pressing operation unit 130c and the rightward pressing operation unit 130d of the cross key 130, and when the leftward pressing operation unit 130c is pressed. By increasing the brightness of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and pressing the rightward pressing operation unit 130d, the brightness of the display screen of the effect display device 9 can be decreased.

Next, the operation of the game machine will be described. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When the power is turned on to the game machine and the power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, CPU 56) After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first makes necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (step S3). Then, after initializing the built-in device (initializing the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), etc.) (step S4), the RAM can be accessed. Is set to (step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is This mode indicates the interrupt address.

Next, the CPU 56 confirms the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing in the backup RAM area (for example, processing when power supply is stopped such as adding parity data) was performed when power supply to the game machine was stopped. (Step S7). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing.

After confirming that the power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 checks the data in the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and saved by the same processing in the power supply stop processing. If the data is restored after the power supply is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process executed when the power is turned on, which is not the time when the power supply is stopped, is executed.

If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs game state recovery processing (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Processing) is performed. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set in the pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. By the processing of steps S41 and S42, the saved contents remain as they are for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, the data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer). ), The part where the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Further, the CPU 56 transmits a display result designation command specifying a display result (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot, small hit, or loss) stored in the backup RAM to the effect control board 80 (step). S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In step S44, for example, when the value of the special symbol pointer described later is also stored in the backup RAM, the CPU 56 may also transmit the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command. Good. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may restart the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command.

In this embodiment, the value of the variable time timer, which will be described later, is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, the measurement of the value of the saved fluctuation time timer is restarted, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is restarted, and the data is saved. When the value of the variable time timer that has been set timed out, the symbol confirmation specification command described later is transmitted. Further, in this embodiment, the value of the special symbol process flag described later is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, the special symbol process processing is restarted from the process corresponding to the value of the saved special symbol process flag.

The CPU 56 may first check whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is 0, instead of always transmitting the display result specification command when the power failure is restored. .. Then, if the value of the fluctuation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and a display result specification command is transmitted. If the fluctuation time timer is 0, the fluctuation time occurs during the power failure. It may be determined that the state is not present and the display result specification command may not be sent.

Further, the CPU 56 may first check whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. Then, if the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and a display result specification command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, the fluctuation occurs during a power failure. It may be determined that it was not inside and the display result specification command may not be sent.

In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the backup RAM area is stored by using both the backup flag and the check data, but only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity to execute the game state recovery process.

In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). By the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) is initialized to 0, but is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. It may be initialized to. Further, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization table stored in the ROM 54 is set in the pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively processing according to the control state are initially set. The value is set.

Further, the CPU 56 is an initialization designation command (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed the initialization process) for initializing the sub-board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs a screen display for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized, that is, an initialization notification.

Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 53 (step S14). The CPU 56 sets the random number circuit 53 to update the value of the random number R, for example, by executing the process according to the random number circuit setting program.

Then, in step S15, the CPU 56 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer is interrupted periodically every 4 ms.

When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt prohibition state is set (step S16), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enable state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when it is not a big hit, and it is displayed. The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number for display. Further, the initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter). It is a random number to determine. Game control processing that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls the game devices such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also called the game device control process), the count value of the random number for determining the normal symbol hit is one round (taking the random number for determining the normal symbol hit). The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value.

In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed by using the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9. In addition, when the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the reach effect is always executed (however, in the case of a sudden probability variation jackpot, the sudden probability variation jackpot symbol (for example, "135") is not a reach. May be displayed as stopped). When the display result of the special symbol is not a big hit symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not to execute the reach effect by performing a lottery to determine the fluctuation pattern type and the fluctuation pattern using random numbers. To do. However, it is the effect control microcomputer 100 that actually executes the control of the reach effect.

When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure detection process for detecting whether or not a power failure signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on) is executed (step S20). The power off signal is output when, for example, the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supply supplied to the game machine. Then, in the power supply cutoff detection process, when the CPU 56 detects that the power supply cutoff signal is output, it executes a power supply stop time process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, the detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their states are determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

Next, the CPU 56 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, and a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). Regarding the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S32 and S33. Take control.

In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol hit determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process process (step S26). In the special symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the grand prize opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the game state.

Next, the normal symbol process process is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process process, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the game state. In the normal symbol process process of step S27, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed based on the detection of the passage of the game ball to the gate 32, and the variation display result is derived and displayed, or the variation display result of the normal symbol is displayed. When is hit, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state or in the closed state.

Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer (step S29).

Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 37 responds to the winning detection based on any of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 relates to turning on / off the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output processing).

Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol display control process for setting the special symbol display control data for displaying the effect of the special symbol according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( Step S32).

Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for displaying the effect of the normal symbol according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data (the normal symbol display control process). Step S33). For example, when the start flag related to the fluctuation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“○” and “×”) of the fluctuation speed of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. At such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating "○" and 0 indicating "x") is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 executes the effect display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting the drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

After that, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process ends.

With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. It may be executed in.

When the misaligned symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is changed after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. A combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not reach the reach state may be stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a "non-reach" (also referred to as "normally out of place") variable display mode when the variable display result is an out-of-order symbol.

When the misaligned symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is changed after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. The reach effect is executed after the reach state is reached, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not finally become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") when the variable display result is "out of reach".

In this embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, the effect symbols are aligned and stopped and displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of the effect display device 9 (however, in the case of a sudden probability change jackpot). In some cases, the probability change jackpot symbol (for example, "135") is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach.

When the small hit "5" is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the variable display mode of the effect symbol is "sudden probability change big hit" in the effect display device 9. After the variable display of the effect symbol is performed in the same manner as in the case of, a predetermined small hit symbol (the same symbol as the sudden probability change big hit symbol, for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the stop display of the small hit symbol "5" on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is referred to as a variable display mode of "small hit". ..

Here, the small hit is a hit that is allowed up to a number of times that the number of times the big winning opening is opened is smaller than that of the big hit (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). When the small hit game is completed, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the probabilistic state to the normal state or transition from the normal state to the probabilistic state. Further, the sudden probability change big hit is allowed up to the number of times that the big winning opening is opened a small number of times in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, opening for 0.1 second is twice), but the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely long. A short jackpot and a jackpot that shifts the gaming state after the jackpot game to a probabilistic state (that is, by doing so, it appears to the player as if it suddenly became a probabilistic state. Is). That is, in this embodiment, the sudden change big hit and the small hit have the same opening pattern of the big winning opening. By controlling in this way, if the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, it is not possible to recognize whether it is a sudden change big hit or a small hit, so it is a high probability state for the player. (Probability change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the game machine is configured so that all the big hit types are probabilistic big hits, it is not necessary to provide the small hits. In addition, when a small hit is provided when all the jackpot types are probability variable jackpots, the sudden probability variable jackpot is only shifted to the probability variation state (high probability state) and is not accompanied by the time saving state (high base state). It is preferable to provide.

7 and 8 are flowcharts showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing (step S26) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the large winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process processing, the CPU 56 starts the first start winning opening 13 if the first starting opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won is turned on, that is, the first starting winning opening 13. If a prize has been won, the first start port switch passage process is executed (steps S311 and S312). Further, if the second start opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 is turned on, the CPU 56 has generated a start winning to the second start winning opening 14. Then, the second start port switch passing process is executed (steps S313 and S314). Then, any of the processes of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning opening switch 13a or the second starting opening switch 14a is not turned on, any of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

The processes of steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the storage number of the numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer (total hold storage number) is confirmed. The number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total reserved memory counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. If you want to make a big hit, set the big hit flag. When it is decided to make a big hit, it is decided whether or not to make a big hit type (for example, normal big hit, probable big hit, sudden probable big hit), and the decision result is stored in the big hit type buffer. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S301 (1 in this example). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 100 issues a variation pattern command (an effect control command that specifies a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variable display of the special symbol) according to the determined variation pattern. The fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started by controlling the transmission to. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S302 (2 in this example).

Display result specification command transmission process (step S302): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to transmit a display result designation command (a production control command indicating whether or not a big hit is made, whether or not a small hit is made, and a big hit type) to the effect control microcomputer 100. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S303 (3 in this example).

Processing during special symbol change (step S303): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the symbol is confirmed on the effect control microcomputer 100. Controls to send a specified command (effect control command indicating that the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed), and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is stepped. Update to the value corresponding to S304 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the fourth symbol when it receives the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

Special symbol stop processing (step S304): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the jackpot flag is set, the effect control microcomputer 100 is given a jackpot start designation command (normal jackpot or effect control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game based on a probability variation jackpot) or a small hit / sudden probability variation jackpot start designation. Controls to send a command (a production control command that specifies the start of a big hit game or a small hit game based on a sudden probability change big hit), and sets the internal state (special symbol process flag) to the value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). Update to. Further, when the small hit flag is set, the control is performed to transmit the small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to step S308. Update to the corresponding value (8 in this example). If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example). In this embodiment, based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4, the special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process is displayed as a special symbol. It is set in the output buffer for setting control data, and in the display control process of step S22, the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer.

Pre-processing for opening the large winning opening (step S305): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening, control is performed to open the large winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the large winning opening. In addition, while controlling the transmission of the large winning opening opening designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the execution time of the large winning opening opening processing is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set in step S306. Update to the value corresponding to (6 in this example). The large winning opening pre-opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the large winning opening pre-opening process is also a process for starting a big hit game. Further, since the value for designating the round is set in the EXT data and transmitted for the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening, a different command for specifying the opening for the large winning opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the jackpot game, a command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted and the tenth round during the jackpot game is executed. Is transmitted with a command (A10A (H)) during which the large winning opening is open to specify round 10.

Processing during opening of the large winning opening (step S306): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the process of opening the large winning opening, processing for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the large winning opening is performed. If the closing condition of the big winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). In addition, control is performed to send a designated command to the effect control microcomputer 100 after the jackpot is opened, and when all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S307 (this). In the example, update to 7).

Jackpot end processing (step S307): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. The effect control microcomputer 100 is given a jackpot end specification command (a production control command that specifies the end of a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot or a probability variation jackpot) or a small hit / sudden probability variation jackpot end designation command (a jackpot game based on a sudden probability variation jackpot) It controls the transmission of an effect control command) for designating the end of the small hit game, and controls the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit game state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating the game state (for example, a probability change flag or a time saving flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

Small hit release preprocessing (step S308): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the small hit opening pre-processing, control is performed to open the large winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the large winning opening. In addition, the execution time of the process during the opening of the large winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). The small hit opening pre-processing is executed every time the large winning opening is opened during the small hit game, but when the first opening during the small hit game is started, the small hit opening preprocessing is performed by the small hit game. It is also the process to start.

Small hit opening process (step S309): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Performs processing to confirm the establishment of the closing conditions for the grand prize opening. If the closing condition of the big winning opening is satisfied and the number of times the big winning opening is opened still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to the value corresponding to step S308 (8 in this example). Update. When all the releases are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S310 (10 in this example).

Small hit end process (step S310): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. The effect control microcomputer 100 is controlled to transmit a small hit / sudden probability change large hit end designation command, and the effect control microcomputer 100 is made to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit game state has ended. Control for. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process. In the main process, first, the initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing the timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 4 ms) of the effect control is performed (step S701). ..

After that, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs the effect control process process (step S705). In the effect control process process, the display control of the effect display device 9 is executed by selecting the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) from each process according to the control state.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs the fourth symbol process process (step S706). In the fourth symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (fourth symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9. The display control of the fourth symbol is executed.

Next, a random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number such as a random number for determining a jackpot symbol is executed (step S707). After that, the process proceeds to step S702.

FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing an effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a ring buffer type command reception buffer capable of storing six 2-byte production control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is composed of a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. Then, a command reception number counter is used to indicate in which area the received command is stored. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. It does not necessarily have to be in the ring buffer format.

The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, which command is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed. The interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM (step S618). ).

If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets the confirmation command reception flag (step S620).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (commands A001 to A002 (H)) (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step S622).

If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command (command A003 (H)) (step S623), the effect control CPU 101 sets the small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command reception flag. (Step S624).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (commands A301 to A302 (H)) (step S625), the effect control CPU 101 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S626).

If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability change big hit end specification command (command A303 (H)) (step S627), the effect control CPU 101 sets the small hit / sudden probability change big hit end specification command reception flag. (Step S628).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S629). Then, the process proceeds to step S611.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the effect control process process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 101 executes a luminance volume setting process (step S800A) for setting the luminance of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and the volume of the sound output from the speaker 27. In this embodiment, in the effect control process process, the luminance volume setting process (step S800A) is executed before the processes of steps S800 to S807, so that in addition to the variable display of the effect symbol, during the big hit game or It is possible to adjust the brightness and volume even during the customer waiting demonstration display in which neither the variable display nor the big hit game is performed.

In this embodiment, the case where the brightness volume setting process is executed in the effect control process process is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, in the effect control main process shown in FIG. 9, the luminance volume setting process may be executed before or after the effect control process process.

Then, the effect control CPU 101 performs any of the processes of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following processes are executed. In the effect control process process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled to realize the variable display of the effect symbol, but the control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process process. It should be noted that even if the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the second special symbol are configured to be executed by different effect control process processes. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is executed depending on which effect control process process is executing the variation display of the effect symbol.

Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801).

Effect symbol variation start process (step S801): Control is performed so that the effect symbol variation is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

Processing during effect symbol change (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each change state (fluctuation speed) constituting the change pattern, and monitors the end of the change time. Then, when the fluctuation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

Effect symbol fluctuation stop processing (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the fluctuation time, the effect display device 9 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the round (step S805).

Processing during the round (step S805): Display control during the round is performed. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not completed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the round post-processing (step S806). If the final round is completed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S807).

Round post-processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the round (step S805).

Big hit end effect processing (step S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813). As described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is transmitted even when the power failure is restored (see step S44). However, as shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is normally transmitted. , The effect symbol variation start processing is started based on the reception of the variation pattern command, and the variation display of the effect symbol is started. Therefore, the effect symbol variation only by receiving the display result specification command without receiving the variation pattern command. The display does not start.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8001). Next, the effect control CPU 101 displays a display result (stop) of the effect symbol according to the variation pattern command read in step S8001 and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command). The symbol) is determined (step S8002). That is, by executing the process of step S8002 by the effect control CPU 101, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, in step S8002, the effect control CPU 101 uses a chance pattern symbol (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-ream. , A combination of a jackpot symbol that does not reach but one symbol is out of alignment) is also determined. Further, the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S8002, the effect control CPU 101 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol based only on the variation pattern command. ..

In step S8002, when the received display result designation command indicates "normal big hit", the effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of the effect symbols in which the three symbols are the same even-numbered symbols as the stop symbols. Further, when the received display result designation command indicates "probability variation jackpot", the effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of the effect symbols in which the three symbols are the same odd number symbols as the stop symbols. Further, when the received display result designation command indicates "sudden probability change big hit" or "small hit", the effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as "135" as the stop symbol. Then, in the case of "off", a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when accompanied by a reach effect, the combination of the effect symbols in which the two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. Further, the combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the "stop symbol" of the effect symbol.

The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of effect symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other to generate a stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

As for the production symbols, the stop symbol (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right are all the same symbol) reminiscent of a jackpot is called a jackpot symbol. Further, in this embodiment, in the case of a probabilistic jackpot, the left, middle, and right sides are stopped and displayed with odd-numbered symbols aligned, so that the odd-numbered symbols are reminiscent of the probabilistic jackpot. A symbol that reminds us of a probabilistic jackpot is called a probabilistic symbol. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when a normal big hit occurs, the left, middle, and right sides are stopped and displayed with even-numbered symbols aligned, so that the even-numbered symbols do not become a probabilistic big hit (usually a big hit). .. A symbol that reminds us that it does not become a probabilistic jackpot is called a non-probable variation symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that reminds us of an outlier is called an outlier symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes the advance notice effect setting process for setting the presence / absence and type of the advance notice effect (step S8003).

In step S8003, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the fluctuation display started this time is a big hit, and if it is a big hit change, the effect control CPU 101 serves as a table for determining the presence / absence and type of the advance notice effect. Select the advance notice production decision table for. Further, in the case of deviation fluctuation, the advance notice effect determination table for deviation is selected as the table for determining the presence / absence and type of the advance notice effect. Whether or not the variable display started this time is a big hit can be determined, for example, by checking the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area. Then, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the selected advance notice effect determination table, and determines the presence / absence and type of the advance notice effect.

FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the advance notice effect determination table. Of these, FIG. 15 (A) shows a specific example of the notice effect determination table for the loss selected when the fluctuation is the loss. Further, FIG. 15B shows a specific example of a notice effect determination table for a big hit selected when the big hit fluctuates. As shown in FIG. 15, judgment values are assigned to the advance notice effect determination table for no advance notice effect, character advance notice effect, button advance notice effect, group advance notice effect, dialogue advance notice effect, and flash advance notice effect. .. As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, in the case of a big hit, the determination value is assigned so that the rate at which one of the advance notice effects is executed is higher than in the case of the loss. There is.

Among the advance notice effects shown in FIG. 15, the "line notice effect" is a advance notice effect executed by displaying the character on the display screen of the effect display device 9 and outputting the voice of the character's dialogue from the speaker 27. .. Therefore, in this embodiment, it can be said that the "speech notice effect" is a notice effect executed mainly by the sound output from the speaker 27. Not limited to the embodiment shown in this embodiment, in addition to the sound output from the speaker 27, the character display of the character's dialogue may be displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

Further, the "flash notice effect" is a notice effect executed by performing a flash display on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Therefore, in this embodiment, it can be said that the "flash notice effect" is a notice effect executed mainly on the intensity of the brightness on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

The advance notice effect to be executed during the variable display of the effect pattern is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment, and various types of advance notice effects such as step-up notice effect, motif notice effect, and mini character notice effect are performed. It may be configured to be feasible.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, a case where the presence / absence and type of the advance notice effect is determined depending on whether or not it is a big hit is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, instead of whether or not it is a big hit, or in addition to whether or not it is a big hit, the presence or absence and type of the advance notice effect may be determined according to the fluctuation pattern. In this case, for example, the presence / absence and type of the advance notice effect may be determined according to the presence / absence of normal reach, the presence / absence of super reach, and the presence / absence of pseudo-ream.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, a case is shown in which any one of the advance notice effects can be executed during one change display of the effect symbols, but only in such an embodiment. I can't. For example, it may be configured so that the execution of a plurality of advance notice effects can be determined at the same time, and the execution of a plurality of advance notice effects can be executed during one variable display of the effect symbols.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table according to the variation pattern and the advance notice effect determined in the advance notice effect setting process (step S8003) (step S8004). Then, the process proceeds to step S8005.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected in step S8004 (step S8005).

The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect device (effect component) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of a collection of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbol. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table, and controls to display the effect symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value.

The process table is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. In addition, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern. In the process table used when executing the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-ream, and the temporary stop symbol in the sliding effect. You may.

Further, the effect control CPU 101 serves as an effect device (effect display device 9 as an effect component, effect component 9) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and the speaker 27) as an effect component is executed (step S8006). For example, the effect display device 9 outputs a command to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps. Further, in order to output the sound from the speaker 27, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 controls the variation pattern command so that the effect pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 101 controls the variation pattern command. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S8007).

Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802) (step S8008).

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol changing process (step S802) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step S8101) and 1 subtracts the value of the variation time timer (step S8102).

Next, when the process timer times out (step S8103), the effect control CPU 101 switches the process data. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step S8105).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is the end timing of the dialogue advance notice effect when the execution of the dialogue advance notice effect is determined in the advance notice effect setting process (see step S8003) (step S8106). ). It should be noted that whether or not it is the end timing of the dialogue advance notice effect can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the fluctuation time timer set in step S8007 of the effect symbol variation start process. If it is the end timing of the dialogue advance notice effect (Y in step S8106), the effect control CPU 101 sets a dialogue advance notice execution flag indicating that the dialogue advance notice effect has been executed in the variable display of the effect symbol. (Step S8107). Then, the process proceeds to step S8110.

Unless it is decided to execute the dialogue advance notice effect, or if it is not the end timing of the dialogue advance notice effect (N in step S8106), the effect control CPU 101 performs a flash advance notice in the advance notice effect setting process (see step S8003). When it is decided to execute the effect, it is confirmed whether or not it is the end timing of the flash notice effect (step S8108). Whether or not the end timing of the flash notice effect is reached can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the fluctuation time timer set in step S8007 of the effect symbol variation start process. If it is the end timing of the flash advance notice effect (Y in step S8108), the effect control CPU 101 sets a flash advance notice execution flag indicating that the flash advance notice effect has been executed in the variable display of the effect symbol. (Step S8109). Then, the process proceeds to step S8110.

Then, if the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step S8110), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) (step S8111).

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol fluctuation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 first resets the dialogue advance notice execution flag or the flash advance notice execution flag, if set (step S8300).

In this embodiment, when the dialogue advance notice effect or the flash advance notice effect is executed during the change display of the effect symbol, the dialogue advance notice executed flag or the flash advance notice executed flag is reset at the end of the change of the effect symbol. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to reset the dialogue advance notice executed flag and the flash advance notice executed flag based on the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the dialogue advance notice effect and the flash advance notice effect are finished. ..

Further, for example, when a plurality of advance notice effects are enabled to be executed during one change display of the effect symbol, after the dialogue advance notice effect is finished and the dialogue advance notice execution flag is set, the flash notice effect is produced. Switch from the dialogue advance notice executed flag to the flash advance notice executed flag and set (reset the dialogue advance notice executed flag and set the flash advance notice executed flag) based on the end of After setting the flash advance notice executed flag, switch from the flash advance notice executed flag to the dialogue advance notice executed flag based on the end of the dialogue advance notice production (reset the flash advance notice executed flag and set the dialogue advance notice executed flag. May be set).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8305. In this embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, the stop symbol display flag is set in step S8304. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set means that the jackpot symbol has been stopped and displayed, but the fanfare effect has not yet been executed. Therefore, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S8302 is executed. Without fail, the process proceeds to step S8305.

When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 controls to confirm and display the determined stop symbol (missing symbol, jackpot symbol) on the display screen of the effect display device 9 (step). S8302). When neither the big hit symbol nor the small hit symbol is displayed in the process of step S8302 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed) (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 shifts to step S8311.

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S8304) and receives the big hit start designation command. It is confirmed whether or not the jackpot start designation command reception flag indicating that the jackpot / sudden probability change jackpot start designation command reception flag is set or the small hit / sudden probability change jackpot start designation command reception flag indicating that the jackpot / sudden probability change jackpot start designation command is received is set (step S8305). .. When the jackpot start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability change jackpot start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S8306) and responds to the fanfare effect. Select the process table (step S8307). If the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag.

Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S8308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is controlled (step S8309). After that, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S8310).

When it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit is performed (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 responds to the effect pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) by changing the value of the effect control process flag. Update to the value (step S8311).

18 and 19 are flowcharts showing the luminance volume setting process (step S800A) in the effect control process process. In the luminance volume setting process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not the luminance adjustment operation using the cross key 130 has been detected (step S4000). Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the left-direction pressing operation unit 130c or the right-direction pressing operation unit 130d of the cross key 130 shown in FIG. 4 is input. If the luminance adjustment operation is not detected (N in step S4000), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the volume adjustment operation using the cross key 130 is detected (step S4001). Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the upward pressing operation unit 130a or the downward pressing operation unit 130b of the cross key 130 shown in FIG. 4 is input. If the volume adjustment operation is detected (Y in step S4001), that is, if only the volume adjustment operation is detected, the effect control CPU 101 changes the volume setting according to the volume adjustment operation (Y). Step S4002). Specifically, when the detection signal from the upward pressing operation unit 130a is input, the volume setting is raised by one step, and when the detection signal from the downward pressing operation unit 130b is input, the volume setting is set to 1. Step down.

If the luminance adjustment operation is detected (Y in step S4000), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the volume adjustment operation using the cross key 130 is detected (step S4003). Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the upward pressing operation unit 130a or the downward pressing operation unit 130b of the cross key 130 shown in FIG. 4 is input. If the volume adjustment operation is not detected (N in step S4003), that is, if only the brightness adjustment operation is detected, the effect control CPU 101 changes the brightness setting according to the brightness adjustment operation (N). Step S4004). Specifically, when the detection signal from the left-direction pressing operation unit 130c is input, the brightness setting is raised by one step, and when the detection signal from the right-direction pressing operation unit 130d is input, the brightness setting is set to 1. Step down.

If the volume adjustment operation is detected in step S4003 (Y in step S4003), it is the case that both the brightness adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are detected at the same time. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the dialogue advance notice execution flag is set (step S4005). If the dialogue advance notice execution flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 gives priority to the volume adjustment operation and changes the volume setting according to the volume adjustment operation (step S4006). Specifically, when the detection signal from the upward pressing operation unit 130a is input, the volume setting is raised by one step, and when the detection signal from the downward pressing operation unit 130b is input, the volume setting is set to 1. Step down.

The fact that the dialogue advance notice execution flag is set means that it is in the state immediately after executing the dialogue advance notice effect during the variable display of the effect symbol. In this embodiment, as described above, since the dialogue warning effect is a notification effect executed mainly by the sound output from the speaker 27, the volume adjustment operation is the intention of the player to operate correctly. Can be estimated. Therefore, in this embodiment, when both the luminance adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are detected at the same time by executing the processes of steps S400 and S4006, and immediately after the execution of the serif notice effect, It is configured to give priority to the volume setting.

If the dialogue advance notice execution flag is not set (N in step S4005), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the flash advance notice execution flag is set (step S4007). If the flash advance notice execution flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 gives priority to the luminance adjustment operation and changes the luminance setting according to the luminance adjustment operation (step S4008). Specifically, when the detection signal from the left-direction pressing operation unit 130c is input, the brightness setting is raised by one step, and when the detection signal from the right-direction pressing operation unit 130d is input, the brightness setting is set to 1. Step down.

The fact that the flash advance notice executed flag is set means that the state immediately after executing the flash advance notice effect during the variable display of the effect symbol. In this embodiment, as described above, since the flash advance notice effect is a advance notice effect executed mainly on the intensity of the brightness on the display screen of the effect display device 9, the brightness adjustment operation is performed by the player. It can be presumed that the intention is correct operation. Therefore, in this embodiment, when both the luminance adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are detected at the same time by executing the processes of steps S4007 and S4008, and immediately after the execution of the flash notice effect, It is configured to give priority to the brightness setting.

If the flash notice execution flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 performs the detected brightness adjustment operation and volume adjustment operation as a brightness up operation (operation for increasing the brightness setting) and a volume down operation (volume setting). It is confirmed whether or not it is a combination with (operation for lowering) (step S4009). Specifically, whether or not the combination of the brightness up operation and the volume down operation is determined by the detection signal from the leftward pressing operation unit 130c of the cross key 130 and the detection signal from the downward pressing operation unit 130b. It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is the case where. If it is a combination of the brightness up operation and the volume down operation, the effect control CPU 101 gives priority to the volume down operation and lowers the volume setting by one step (step S4010).

Unless it is a combination of the brightness up operation and the volume down operation, the effect control CPU 101 has the detected brightness adjustment operation and volume adjustment operation of the brightness down operation (operation for lowering the brightness setting) and the volume up operation (volume). It is confirmed whether or not it is a combination with the operation for raising the setting of (step S4011). Specifically, whether or not the combination of the brightness down operation and the volume up operation is determined by the detection signal from the rightward pressing operation unit 130d of the cross key 130 and the detection signal from the upward pressing operation unit 130a. It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is the case where. If it is a combination of the brightness down operation and the volume up operation, the effect control CPU 101 gives priority to the brightness down operation and lowers the brightness setting by one step (step S4012).

If it is not a combination of the brightness down operation and the volume up operation, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the detected brightness adjustment operation and volume adjustment operation are a combination of the brightness up operation and the volume up operation ( Step S4013). Whether or not the combination of the brightness up operation and the volume up operation is specifically determined by the detection signal from the leftward pressing operation unit 130c of the cross key 130 and the detection signal from the upward pressing operation unit 130a. It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is the case where. If it is a combination of the brightness up operation and the volume up operation, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the current brightness setting level is higher than the current volume setting level (step S4014). If the current brightness setting level is higher than the current volume setting level, the effect control CPU 101 gives priority to the volume up operation and raises the volume setting by one step (step S4015). On the other hand, if the current brightness setting level is not higher than the current volume setting level (that is, if the current brightness setting level is equal to or lower than the current volume setting level), the effect control CPU 101 increases the brightness. Prioritizing the operation, the brightness setting is raised by one step (step S4016).

The current brightness setting level and the current volume setting level may be the same, but in this embodiment, if the current brightness setting level and the current volume setting level are the same, Since the current brightness setting level is not larger than the current volume setting level, it is determined to be N in step S4014, the process proceeds to step S4016, and the brightness up operation is prioritized to raise the brightness setting by one step. It is configured as follows. Not limited to such a state, if the current brightness setting level and the current volume setting level are the same, the volume setting may be set to be raised by one step with priority given to the volume up operation. Good.

If it is not a combination of the brightness up operation and the volume up operation, it is a combination of the brightness down operation and the volume down operation. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the current brightness setting level is smaller than the current volume setting level (step S4017). If the current brightness setting level is smaller than the current volume setting level, the effect control CPU 101 gives priority to the volume down operation and lowers the volume setting by one step (step S4018). On the other hand, if the current brightness setting level is not smaller than the current volume setting level (that is, if the current brightness setting level is equal to or higher than the current volume setting level), the effect control CPU 101 reduces the brightness. Prioritizing the operation, the brightness setting is lowered by one step (step S4019).

The current brightness setting level and the current volume setting level may be the same, but in this embodiment, if the current brightness setting level and the current volume setting level are the same, Since the current brightness setting level is not smaller than the current volume setting level, it is determined to be N in step S4017 and the process proceeds to step S4019, giving priority to the brightness down operation and lowering the brightness setting by one step. It is configured as follows. Not limited to such a state, if the current brightness setting level and the current volume setting level are the same, the volume setting may be set to be lowered by one step with priority given to the volume down operation. Good.

Further, in this embodiment, when both the brightness adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are performed at the same time, the input itself of both the brightness adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation is accepted, and then the brightness volume setting process is performed. The case where the brightness adjustment and the volume adjustment processing is performed by determining which of the brightness adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation is prioritized is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when both the brightness adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are performed at the same time, the cross key 130 itself may be configured so as to output only the detection signal for either operation. In this case, for example, even when the brightness down operation and the volume up operation are performed at the same time, the cross key 130 may be configured to output only the detection signal for the brightness down operation.

Further, for example, when both the detection signal for the brightness adjustment operation and the detection signal for the volume adjustment operation are input at the same time, only one of the detection signals is input and the other detection signal is discarded. An input circuit or the like on the computer 100 side may be configured. In this case, for example, even if the detection signal for the brightness down operation and the detection signal for the volume up operation are input at the same time, the input circuit or the like inputs only the detection signal for the brightness down operation and the detection signal for the volume up operation. May be configured to discard.

Next, specific examples of brightness adjustment and volume adjustment will be described. FIG. 20 is a timing chart for explaining specific examples of brightness adjustment and volume adjustment. As shown in FIG. 20, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the brightness setting level can be set to 5 levels from level 1 to level 5, and the volume setting level can be set to 5 levels from level 1 to level 5. Suppose that Further, in the example shown in FIG. 20, it is assumed that the brightness setting level is set to level 4 and the volume setting level is set to level 3 as the initial state. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 20, it will be described below assuming that it is not immediately after the dialogue advance notice effect or the flash advance notice effect is executed.

Not limited to the embodiment shown in this embodiment, for example, the display screen of the effect display device 9 may be completely darkened by allowing the brightness setting level to be adjusted to level 0, or the volume setting level may be adjusted to level 0. It may be configured so that it can be completely muted if possible.

In the above state, as shown in FIG. 20, it is assumed that the operation using the cross key 130 is performed at the timing T1 and the brightness adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are detected at the same time, and the combination of the detected operations is the brightness. It is assumed that the operation was up and volume down. In this case, as shown in FIG. 20, the volume down operation is prioritized, the volume setting level is changed from level 3 to level 2 by one step, and the brightness setting level is not changed at level 4 (step S4009). , S4010).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20, it is assumed that the operation using the cross key 130 is performed at the timing T2, and the brightness adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are detected at the same time, and the combination of the detected operations is the brightness down operation. It is assumed that the volume was increased. In this case, as shown in FIG. 20, the brightness down operation is prioritized, the brightness setting level is changed from level 4 to level 3 by one step, and the volume setting level is not changed as level 2 (step S4011). , S4012).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20, it is assumed that the operation using the cross key 130 is performed at the timing T3, and the brightness adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are detected at the same time, and the combination of the detected operations is the brightness up operation. It is assumed that the volume was increased. In this case, at the timing T3, since the current luminance setting level is level 3 and the current luminance setting level is 2, the current luminance setting level is larger than the current luminance setting level (step S4014). (Refer to), as shown in FIG. 20, the volume up operation is prioritized, the volume setting level is changed from level 2 to level 3 by one step, and the brightness setting level is not changed at level 3 (step S4015). reference).

After that, it is assumed that the brightness setting level is changed to level 2 and the volume setting level is maintained at level 3. In this state, as shown in FIG. 20, it is assumed that the operation using the cross key 130 is performed at the timing T4, and the brightness adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are detected at the same time, and the combination of the detected operations increases the brightness. It is assumed that the operation and the volume up operation were performed. In this case, at the timing T4, since the current luminance setting level is level 2 and the current luminance setting level is 3, the current luminance setting level is smaller than the current luminance setting level (step S4014). (Refer to), as shown in FIG. 20, the brightness up operation is prioritized, the brightness setting level is changed from level 2 to level 3 by one step, and the volume setting level is not changed at level 3 (step S4016). reference).

After that, it is assumed that the brightness setting level is changed to level 2 and the volume setting level is maintained at level 3. In this state, as shown in FIG. 20, it is assumed that the operation using the cross key 130 is performed at the timing T5, and the brightness adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are detected at the same time, and the combination of the detected operations is reduced in brightness. It is assumed that the operation and the volume down operation were performed. In this case, since the current luminance setting level is level 2 and the current luminance setting level is 3 at the timing T5, the current luminance setting level is smaller than the current luminance setting level (step S4017). (See), as shown in FIG. 20, the volume down operation is prioritized, the volume setting level is changed from level 3 to level 2 by one step, and the brightness setting level is not changed at level 2 (step S4018). reference).

After that, it is assumed that the brightness setting level is changed to level 3 and the volume setting level is maintained at level 2. In this state, as shown in FIG. 20, it is assumed that the operation using the cross key 130 is performed at the timing T6, and the brightness adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are detected at the same time, and the combination of the detected operations is reduced in brightness. It is assumed that the operation and the volume down operation were performed. In this case, since the current luminance setting level is level 3 and the current luminance setting level is 2 at the timing T6, the current luminance setting level is larger than the current luminance setting level (step S4017). (Refer to), as shown in FIG. 20, the brightness down operation is prioritized, the brightness setting level is changed from level 3 to level 2 by one step, and the brightness setting level is not changed as level 2 (step S4019). reference).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20, the case where the range of the brightness setting level and the volume setting level are both the same in the five stages of levels 1 to 5 is shown. The setting stage may be different depending on the brightness setting level and the volume setting level. For example, the brightness setting level can be adjusted in three stages of levels 1 to 3, while the volume setting level may be adjusted in 10 stages of levels 1 to 10. In this case, for example, when the brightness setting level is level 3 and the volume setting level is level 7, the apparent numerical level is higher at level 7, but the brightness setting level is higher. Is the maximum value of level 3, so it is judged that the brightness production stage is higher (brightness is higher than the current setting level), and either brightness or volume is prioritized for brightness or volume. May be adjusted.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the volume adjusting operation means for adjusting the volume (in this example, the upward pressing operation unit 130a and the downward operation unit 130b of the cross key 130) and the brightness. A process for adjusting the brightness based on the operation of the brightness adjusting operation means (in this example, the left pressing operation unit 130c and the right operating unit 130d of the cross key 130) for adjusting the volume. And, it is possible to execute a process of adjusting the brightness based on the operation of the brightness adjustment operating means. Further, when the volume lowering operation by the volume adjusting operation means and the brightness increasing operation by the brightness adjusting operation means are performed, the volume lowering process is preferentially executed (see the process of timing T1 shown in FIG. 20). .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered. That is, when both the operation of lowering the volume and the operation of increasing the brightness are performed, the priority is given to the case where the player feels that the volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 is too loud and noisy. Since it is considered to be high, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered by preferentially executing the process of lowering the volume.

Further, according to this embodiment, when the operation of lowering the brightness by the brightness adjusting operation means and the operation of raising the volume by the volume adjusting operation means are performed, the process of lowering the brightness is preferentially executed (FIG. 20). Refer to the processing of timing T2 shown in (1). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered. That is, when both the operation of lowering the brightness and the operation of raising the volume are performed, the priority is given to the case where the player feels that the brightness of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is too high and dazzling. Since it is considered to be high, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered by preferentially executing the process of lowering the brightness.

Further, according to this embodiment, when an operation of raising the volume by the volume adjusting operation means and an operation of raising the brightness by the brightness adjusting operation means are performed, the lower of the volume and the brightness is raised. The processing is preferentially executed (see the processing at timings T3 and T4 shown in FIG. 20). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered. That is, when both the volume raising operation and the brightness raising operation are performed, it is considered that the lower the current production stage (setting level), the more room for raising the production stage and the higher the priority. It is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered by preferentially executing the process of increasing the lower of the effect and the brightness.

In this embodiment, when both the volume raising operation and the brightness raising operation are performed, a case is shown in which the process of raising the volume and the brightness, whichever has the lower production stage, is preferentially executed. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, conversely, when both the volume raising operation and the brightness raising operation are performed, the process of raising the volume and the brightness, whichever has the higher production stage, may be preferentially executed. Good.

Further, in this embodiment, when the brightness up operation and the volume up operation are performed at the same time, a process of raising the setting level by giving priority to the lower current setting level of the volume and the brightness is shown. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the brightness up operation and the volume up operation are performed at the same time, one of the volume and the brightness, whichever is predetermined, may be prioritized to raise the set level (modification example). A). With such a configuration, the volume and brightness can be preferably adjusted.

Further, according to this embodiment, when the operation of lowering the volume by the volume adjusting operation means and the operation of lowering the brightness by the brightness adjusting operation means are performed, the higher of the volume and the brightness is lowered. The processing is preferentially executed (see the processing at timings T5 and T6 shown in FIG. 20). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered. That is, when both the volume lowering operation and the brightness lowering operation are performed, it is considered that the higher the current production stage (setting level), the more room for lowering the production stage and the higher the priority. It is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered by preferentially executing the process of lowering the higher of the effect and the brightness.

In this embodiment, when both the volume lowering operation and the brightness lowering operation are performed, a case is shown in which the process of raising the volume and the brightness, whichever is higher, is preferentially executed. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, conversely, when both the volume lowering operation and the brightness lowering operation are performed, the process of lowering the lower volume and brightness of the volume and brightness may be preferentially executed. Good.

Further, in this embodiment, when the brightness down operation and the volume down operation are performed at the same time, the process of lowering the setting level by giving priority to the higher current setting level of the volume and the brightness is shown. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the brightness down operation and the volume down operation are performed at the same time, one of the volume and the brightness, whichever is predetermined, may be prioritized to lower the set level (modification example). B). With such a configuration, the volume and brightness can be preferably adjusted.

Further, according to this embodiment, when the operation by the volume adjusting operation means and the operation by the brightness adjusting operation means are performed, the volume and the brightness are determined based on the effect executed before the operation is performed. Priority is given to the process of adjusting one of them (in this example, if the dialogue advance notice effect is executed immediately before, the volume adjustment is given priority and the flash advance notice effect is executed immediately before. For example, priority is given to brightness adjustment). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered. That is, immediately after the dialogue warning effect executed mainly by the sound output from the speaker 27, the volume adjustment is preferentially executed, and the flash advance notice is executed mainly by the intensity of the brightness on the display screen of the effect display device 9. By preferentially executing the brightness adjustment immediately after the effect, the volume or the brightness can be adjusted in consideration of the player's intention, so that it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered.

In this embodiment, if the dialogue advance notice effect is executed immediately before, the volume adjustment is prioritized and executed, and if the flash advance notice effect is executed immediately before, the brightness adjustment is preferentially executed. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when various notice effects other than the dialogue notice effect and the flash notice effect are configured to be executable, it is necessary to associate whether to execute the volume adjustment with priority or the brightness adjustment with priority for all the notice effects. It may be configured as.

Further, for example, when the configuration is such that the volume adjustment is preferentially executed or the brightness adjustment is preferentially executed for a plurality of advance notice effects as described above, the advance notice effect has a stronger effect intensity (for example). , The higher the volume of the advance notice effect, the higher the brightness of the advance notice effect), and the period in which the priority execution of the volume adjustment or the brightness adjustment is reflected may be longer. In this case, for example, in the effect symbol change processing and the effect symbol change stop process, the length of the period until the dialogue advance notice executed flag and the flash advance notice executed flag are reset is configured to be different according to the effect intensity. Just do it.

Further, in this embodiment, as the volume adjusting operation means and the brightness adjusting operating means, the upward pressing operation unit 130a and the downward pressing operation unit 130b, the leftward pressing operation unit 130c, and the rightward pressing of the cross key 130, respectively. Although the case where it is realized by the operation unit 130d is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, an operation button dedicated to volume adjustment and an operation button dedicated to brightness adjustment may be provided, and various modes of operation means can be considered.

Further, in this embodiment, the case where the brightness of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and the volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 are adjusted is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the brightness and the amount of light of LEDs and lamps provided in the game machine such as the decorative LED 25 and the frame LED 28 may be adjustable, and the processing shown in this embodiment may be applied.

Further, not limited to brightness adjustment and volume adjustment, for example, when the execution frequency of a predetermined advance notice effect can be adjusted in a plurality of stages (for example, 1 to 5 stages), or when an operation button having a vibration function is provided, a vibration operation is performed. The strength may be adjustable in a plurality of steps (for example, 1 step to 5 steps), or various things may be adjusted so as to apply the configuration shown in this embodiment. ..

Further, in this embodiment, when the brightness adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are performed at the same time, only one of the operations is enabled and the other operation is invalidated, so that one operation is prioritized. Although shown, the method of prioritizing one of the operations is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, when the brightness adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are performed at the same time, the adjustment process based on the priority operation is executed first, and then the adjustment process based on the other operation is executed. You may.

Embodiment 2.
In the first embodiment, it may be configured to further include a so-called automatic continuous striking function that detects that the continuous striking operation is being performed based on the continuation of the long press operation. Hereinafter, a second embodiment configured to have an automatic continuous striking function will be described.

In this embodiment, detailed description of the portion having the same configuration and processing as that of the first embodiment will be omitted, and a portion different from that of the first embodiment will be mainly described.

Further, in this embodiment, instead of the operation button 120 shown in the first embodiment, a stick controller that the player can grasp and tilt near the center of the hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 3 (Not shown) and a first push button (not shown) that can be operated by the player by pressing operation or the like are provided, and the player can operate by pressing operation or the like at a position near the ball striking operation handle 5. It is assumed that a second push button (not shown) is provided.

Further, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the jackpot types include "probability variation A" and "non-probability variation", which are 16 round jackpots, and "probability variation B", which is a 5-round jackpot.

Further, in this embodiment, in the effect symbol changing process (step S802), the effect control CPU 101 executes the advance notice effect process for executing the advance notice effect.

21 to 23 are flowcharts showing an example of the advance notice effect processing in the second embodiment. In the advance notice effect processing, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the advance notice effect execution flag is set, that is, whether or not the advance notice effect is started (S331).

When the advance notice effect execution flag is not set (S331; N), in S332, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the advance notice effect start waiting timer to -1. The timer for waiting for the start of the advance notice effect is set in the selection of the process table when it is decided to perform the advance notice effect in the effect symbol variation start process. If the timer for waiting for the start of the advance notice effect is not out of the timer (S333; N), the process ends. When the timer for waiting for the start of the advance notice effect is out, that is, when it is the start timing of the advance notice effect (S333; Y), the process proceeds to S334.

In S334, the effect control CPU 101 sets the advance notice effect execution flag indicating that the advance notice effect is being executed. Further, a value corresponding to the advance notice effect period corresponding to the advance notice effect is set in the advance notice effect period timer (S335).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 reads and sets the advance notice effect process table corresponding to the advance notice effect (notice effect A, advance notice effect B) to be executed (S336), and then the advance notice effect in the process data 1 of the selected process table. The process timer is started (S337). In the present embodiment, the advance notice effect process table corresponding to all combinations of each advance notice effect (notice effect A and advance notice effect B) is stored in the ROM in advance.

Then, the effect control CPU 101 produces an effect according to the contents of the first process data 1 of the set advance notice effect process table (display control execution data 1, LED control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1, etc.). Start controlling the devices (effect display device 9 as a production part, decorative LED 25 as a production part, frame LED 28, and speaker 27 as a production part, stick controller, first push button, second push button). (S338).

In addition, the effect control CPU 101 counts the number of times the first push button or the second push button is operated (the number of repeated hits) during the operation acceptance period of the first push button or the second push button during the execution of the advance notice effect. The value of the counter for the number of repeated hits, and the long press operation of the first push button and the second push button during the operation acceptance period of the first push button and the second push button during the execution of the notice effect are performed by the first push button and the first push button. 2 The value of the auto-repeated number counter for counting the number of times regarded as the operation of the push button (auto-repeated number of times), and the long-press operation of the first push button and the second push button are the first push button and the second push In order to measure the period considered to be the operation of the button, the value of the long-press determination timer and the value of the long-press determination timer are set to "0" respectively, and the advance notice effect processing is terminated (S339, S340, S341).

In the present embodiment, a counter for the number of repeated hits for counting the number of times the first push button and the second push button are operated (the number of repeated hits) and a long press operation of the first push button and the second push button are performed. An example has been exemplified in a form in which an auto continuous hit count counter for counting the number of times (auto continuous hit count) regarded as an operation of the first push button or the second push button is individually provided, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the number of automatic continuous hits may be added to the continuous hit count counter, and the automatic continuous hit count counter may not be provided.

Further, when the advance notice effect execution flag is set in S331, the process proceeds to S342, and the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the advance notice effect process timer for changing the process of the advance notice effect to -1. Then, the value of the advance notice effect period timer for timing the end of the advance notice effect period is set to -1 (S343). When the advance notice effect period timer goes out (the value becomes 0) (S344; Y), the advance notice effect execution flag is cleared and the advance notice effect process ends (S356).

When the advance notice effect period timer is not timer-out (S344; N), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the advance notice effect process timer has timed out (S345). If the advance notice effect process timer is out, the advance notice effect process data of the advance notice effect is switched (S346). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the next set value of the advance notice effect process timer in the advance notice effect process table in the process timer (S347). In addition, the control state for the effect device (effect component) is based on the display control execution data, the LED control execution data, the sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data, etc. included in the advance notice effect process data set next. Is changed (S348a), and the process proceeds to S349.

When the advance notice effect process timer is not timer-out (S345; N), the display control execution data, the LED control execution data, and the sound control execution included in the advance notice effect process data corresponding to the running advance notice effect process timer are executed. The control state for the effect device (effect component) is changed (S348b) based on the data, the operation unit control execution data, and the like, and the process proceeds to S349.

In S349, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the operation promotion image display start timing. In the case of the promotion image display timing (S349; Y), the display of the image of the first push button as the operation promotion image on the effect display device 9 is started, and the display of the meter corresponding to repeated hits on the effect display device 9 is started. , Proceed to S352. If it is not the operation promotion image display start timing (S349; N), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to S352 without going through S350 and S351.

In S352, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the push button operation is being accepted based on the content of the advance notice effect process data being executed. If the push button operation is being accepted (S352; Y), the process proceeds to S361, and if the push button operation is not being accepted (S352; N), the process is further based on the content of the ongoing advance notice effect process data. It is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the image display effect (S353). In the case of the start timing of the image display effect (S353; Y), whether or not the sum of the value of the continuous hit count counter and the value of the auto continuous hit count counter has reached the execution count of the image display effect (the meter corresponding to the continuous hit is the final mode). Whether or not it has been updated to (full tank)) is determined (S354).

When the sum of the value of the continuous hit count counter and the value of the automatic repeated hit count counter reaches the number of times the image display effect is executed (S354; Y), the effect display device 9 starts displaying the image according to the effect type. The notice production process ends (S355).

If it is not the image display effect start timing (S353; N), or if the sum of the value of the continuous hit count counter and the value of the auto continuous hit count counter has not reached the number of times the image display effect is executed (S354; N), execute S355. The notice production process ends without any notice. In the present embodiment, if the continuous hitting compatible meter is in the final mode when the push button operation acceptance period ends, the effect display device 9 displays an image according to the effect type. The present invention is not limited to this, and even during the push button operation acceptance period, if the meter corresponding to repeated hits is in the final mode, the effect display device 9 can be used without waiting for the end of the push button operation acceptance period. An image corresponding to the production type may be displayed.

Then, in S361, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the first push button is operated. When there is an operation of the first push button (S361; Y), a button LED light emitting process (S362) for causing the first push button to emit light and a vibration motor (not shown) for vibrating the first push button. The vibration motor drive process (S363) for driving (vibrating) the LED is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, when the first push button is operated regardless of whether it is long-pressed or repeatedly hit during the push button operation acceptance period, the first push button emits light and vibrates during the operation period. , When the operation of the first push button is interrupted, the light emission and vibration of the first push button are stopped, but the present invention is not limited to this, and during the push button operation acceptance period. , The light emitting mode and the vibration mode of the first push button may be different depending on whether or not the first push button is operated.

Then, it is determined whether or not the flag for determining whether or not the first push button is long-pressed is set (S364). If the first push button long press determination flag is set (S364; Y), the process proceeds to S368, and if the first push button long press determination flag is not set (S364; N), the number of repeated hits is set. The value of the counter is incremented by +1 (S365), the flag for determining long press of the first push button is set, and the process proceeds to S368 (S366).

When it is determined in S361 that there is no operation of the first push button (S361; N), if the first push button long press determination flag is set, the first push button long press determination flag is set. Clear and proceed to S368 (S367).

In S368, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not there is an operation of the second push button. When there is an operation of the second push button (S368; Y), it is determined whether or not the flag for determining whether or not the second push button is long-pressed is set. Judgment (S369). If the second push button long press determination flag is set (S369; Y), the process proceeds to S373, and if the second push button long press determination flag is not set (S369; N), the number of repeated hits is set. The value of the counter is incremented by +1 (S370), the second push button long press determination flag is set, and the process proceeds to S373 (S371).

When it is determined in S368 that there is no operation of the second push button (S368; N), if the second push button long press determination flag is set, the second push button long press determination flag is set. Clear and proceed to S373 (S372).

In S373, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not both the first push button long press determination flag and the second push button long press determination flag are set. When both the first push button long press determination flag and the second push button long press determination flag are set (S373; Y), the process proceeds to S391, and the first push button long press determination flag and the second push button long press determination flag are set. When both the push button long press determination flag is not set, or only one of the first push button long press determination flag and the second push button long press determination flag is set (S373; N). ) Further determines whether or not the first push button long press determination flag is set (S374).

If the first push button long press determination flag is set (S374; Y), the process proceeds to S376, and if the first push button long press determination flag is not set (S374; N), the process further proceeds. It is determined whether or not the second push button long press determination flag is set (S375). If the second push button long press determination flag is set (S375; Y), the process proceeds to S382, and if the second push button long press determination flag is not set (S375; N), a notice effect is produced. End the process.

In S376, the effect control CPU 101 decrements the long press determination timer by +1 based on the fact that the first push button long press determination flag is set (S374; Y) (S376), and the value of the long press determination timer. Determines whether or not the long press operation of the first push button has reached the auto-continuous hitting determination value which is regarded as the operation of the first push button (S377). When the value of the long press determination timer becomes the auto-continuous hit determination value (S377; Y), the first push button auto-continuous hitting flag indicating that the first push button is being automatically hit is set (S378). Then, it is determined whether or not the flag for automatically repeatedly hitting the second push button, which indicates that the second push button is being repeatedly hit, is set (S379).

When the second push button auto-continuous hitting flag is set (S379; Y), that is, when the second push button auto-continuous hitting is already in progress and the first push button auto-continuous hitting is started. , The second push button auto-continuous hitting flag is cleared (S380), and the value of the auto-continuous hit count counter is set to "0" to proceed to S393 (S381). If the second push button auto continuous hitting flag is not set (S379; N), the process proceeds to S393 without going through S380 and S381.

Further, in S382, the effect control CPU 101 adds +1 to the long press determination timer (S382) based on the fact that the second push button long press determination flag is set (S375; Y), and the long press determination timer It is determined whether or not the value of is an auto-continuous hitting determination value in which the long-pressing operation of the second push button is regarded as the operation of the second push button (S383). The long press determination timer (long press determination timer for determining the long press of the second push button) that increases +1 in S382 is the long press determination timer (to determine the long press of the first push button) that increases +1 in S376. The timer is the same as the long press determination timer), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the long press determination timer for determining the long press of the first push button and the long press of the second push button are long-pressed. The long-press determination timer for determining the above may be a different long-press determination timer.

When the value of the long press determination timer becomes the auto continuous hit determination value (S383; Y), the second push button auto continuous hitting flag indicating that the second push button is being automatically hit is set (S384). Then, it is determined whether or not the first push button auto-continuously hitting flag indicating that the first push-button is being automatically hit is set (S385).

When the first push button auto-continuous hitting flag is set (S385; Y), that is, when the first push button auto-continuous hitting is already in progress and the second push button auto-continuous hitting is started. , The first push button auto-continuous hitting flag is cleared (S386), and the value of the auto-continuous hit count counter is set to "0" to proceed to S393 (S387). If the first push button auto continuous hitting flag is not set (S385; N), the process proceeds to S393 without executing S386 and S387.

If the value of the long press determination timer in S377 and S383 is not the automatic continuous hit determination value, the advance notice effect processing is terminated. As described above, in the present embodiment, the long press of the first push button and the long press of the second push button are determined by using the long press determination timer, and the establishment of automatic continuous hitting is established by using the long press determination timer. An example of a mode in which the determination of automatic repeated hits is performed using the long press determination timer even after the determination is made, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the long press of the first push button and the second push button are performed. A different timer may be used between the timer for determining the long press of and the timer for determining the automatic continuous hit after determining the establishment of the automatic continuous hit based on the long press.

Further, in S391, the effect control CPU 101 sets the long press determination timer based on the fact that both the first push button long press determination flag and the second push button long press determination flag are set (S373; Y). Whether the value is incremented by 1 and the value of the long press determination timer becomes an auto-continuous hit determination value in which the long press operation of the first push button and the second push button is regarded as the operation of the first push button and the second push button. Whether or not it is determined (S392). When the value of the long press determination timer becomes the automatic continuous hit determination value (S392; Y), after the execution of any of S381 and S387, the value of the long press determination timer is set to "0" (S393). The value of the auto-continuous hit count counter is incremented by 1 (S394), and the process proceeds to S395. If the value of the long press determination timer is not the automatic continuous hit determination value (S392; N), the process proceeds to S395 without going through S393 and S394.

When the first push button auto-continuous hitting flag is set (S385; Y), that is, when the first push button auto-continuous hitting is already in progress and the second push button auto-continuous hitting is started. , The first push button auto-continuous hitting flag is cleared (S386), and the value of the auto-continuous hit count counter is set to "0" to proceed to S393 (S387). If the first push button auto continuous hitting flag is not set (S385; N), the process proceeds to S393 without executing S386 and S387. Then, in S395, the effect control CPU 101 updates the display mode of the continuous stroke compatible meter according to the value of the sum of the continuous stroke count counter and the automatic continuous stroke count counter, and ends the advance notice effect process.

That is, in the advance notice effect of the present embodiment, when the automatic repeated hitting of the first push button is started in the state where the value of the automatic repeated hitting count counter is added based on the automatic repeated hitting of the second push button, the first The value of the auto-continuous hit count counter added based on the auto-continuous hits of the two push buttons becomes invalid, and the value of the auto-continuous hit count counter is added again based on the auto-continuous hits of the first push button.

Further, when the automatic repeated hitting of the second push button is started in the state where the value of the automatic repeated hitting counter is added based on the automatic repeated hitting of the first push button, the automatic repeated hitting of the first push button is performed. The added value of the automatic repeated hit count counter becomes invalid, and the value of the automatic repeated hit count counter is added again based on the automatic repeated hits of the second push button.

Furthermore, when the first push button and the second push button are held down at the same time, the value of the auto-continuous hit count counter is the same as when one of the first push button and the second push button is held down. Addition is done. On the other hand, when the player repeatedly executes (continuously hits) both the operations of the first push button and the second push button, both the operation of the first push button and the operation of the second push button are repeated. Based on this, the value of the repeated hit count counter is added.

That is, in the advance notice effect of the present embodiment, when the first push button and the second push button are held down at the same time, one of the first push button and the second push button is held down. When the number of meters corresponding to repeated hits increases at the same speed and the player repeatedly executes (continuously hits) both the operations of the first push button and the second push button, the player performs the first push button and the first push button. 2 The meter corresponding to repeated hits is updated faster than the case where one operation with the push button is repeatedly executed (continuous hits). When the player repeatedly executes both the first push button and the second push button, the speed at which the player repeatedly hits the first push button 31B and the speed at which the second push button is repeatedly hit are set. It depends. When both the operations of the first push button and the second push button are repeatedly executed (continuously hit), if the operations of the first push button and the second push button are detected during the same interruption. , The operation of the first push button and the second push button may be determined that the push button has been operated once or that the push button has not been operated.

24 to 26 are flowcharts showing an example of the process during the jackpot game according to the second embodiment. The jackpot game processing corresponds to, for example, the round processing (step S805) and the round post processing (step S806) shown in the first embodiment. In the process during the big hit game, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the designated command reception flag after opening the big winning opening is set, which indicates that the designated command has been received after opening the big winning opening (S411). When the designated command reception flag is set after the big winning opening is opened (S411; Y), whether or not the finished round is the final round, that is, the big hit type of the big hit game is "probability change A" or "non-probability change A". If it is "probability change", it is determined whether or not the designated command is a command indicating the 16th round after opening the big prize opening, and if the big hit type of the big hit game is "probability change B", the big winning opening is opened. It is determined whether or not the post-designated command is a command indicating the fifth round (S433).

When the finished round is the final round (S433; Y), the designated command reception flag is cleared after the big winning opening is opened (S434), and the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process. Ends the processing during the jackpot game. If the finished round is not the final round (S433; N), the process during the big hit game is finished without going through S434 and S435.

If the designated command reception flag is not set after the large winning opening is opened in S411 (S411; N), the designated command receiving flag during opening of the large winning opening is set to indicate that the designated command during opening of the large winning opening is received. It is determined whether or not the command is performed (S412). If the designated command reception flag during opening of the large winning opening is not set (S412; N), the process proceeds to S422, and if the designated command receiving flag during opening of the large winning opening is set (S412; Y), the notification effect is produced. It is determined whether or not it is the execution round of (S413). In the present embodiment, the execution round of the notification effect is the sixth round, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the round for executing the notification effect is any round out of 1 to 16. It may be decided by lottery for each big hit game.

If it is not the execution round of the notification effect (S413; N), the process table for the round effect is set according to the round (S414), and the process timer for the round exercise is started to end the process during the big hit game (S415). .. Further, in the case of the execution round of the notification effect (S413; Y), it is determined whether or not there is a decision to execute the probability variation notification effect (S416).

When there is a decision to execute the probability change notification effect (S416; Y), that is, when the jackpot type of the jackpot is "probability change A", the process table for the probability change notification effect is set as the round effect and the process proceeds to S419 (S419). S417). Further, when there is no decision to execute the probability change notification effect (S416; N), that is, when the jackpot type of the jackpot is "non-probability", a process table for the non-probability notification effect as a round effect is set. Proceed to S419 (S418).

In S419, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the continuous hit count counter, the value of the automatic continuous hit count counter, and the value of the long press determination timer to "0", respectively, and ends the process during the big hit game (S419, S420, S421).

Further, in S422, the effect control CPU 101 sets the round effect process timer to -1 based on the fact that the designated command reception flag during the opening of the large winning opening is not set (S412; N). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the round effect process timer has timed out (S423). If the round effect process timer is out of timer (S423; Y), the round effect process data is switched (S424). That is, the process timer for round effect is started again by setting the process timer setting value set next in the process table for round effect to the process timer for round effect (S425). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the display control execution data, the LED control execution data, the sound control execution data, the operation unit control data, etc., which are set next (S426a). On the other hand, when the round effect process timer is not timer-out (S423; N), the contents of the process data corresponding to the round effect process timer (display control execution data, LED control execution data, sound control execution data, operation). Control of the effect device (effect component) is executed according to (part control data, etc.) (S426b).

After the execution of S426a or S426b, the effect control CPU 101 displays the image of the first push button and a message prompting the player to operate (continuously hit) the first push button a plurality of times (for example, "continuous hit!"). It is determined whether or not it is the display start timing of the operation promotion image including and (S427). When it is the display start timing of the operation promotion image (S427; Y), the image of the first push button and a message prompting the player to operate the first push button a plurality of times (continuous hits) (for example, "continuous hits"). The display of the operation promotion image including "!" Etc. and the display of the meter corresponding to repeated hits are started in the effect display device 9, and the process proceeds to S430 (S428, S429). If it is not the display start timing of the operation promotion image (S427; N), the process proceeds to S430 without executing S428 and S429.

In S430, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the operation of the push buttons (first push button and second push button) is being accepted. When it is not during the push button operation acceptance period (S430; N), it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the image display effect (S431). When it is the start timing of the image display effect (S431; Y), the effect display device 9 starts displaying an image (probability change notification image or non-probability change notification image) according to the effect type of the image display effect, and the jackpot game is in progress. When the process is completed (S432) and it is not the start timing of the image display effect (S431; N), the effect during the jackpot game is ended without going through S432.

In the present embodiment, an example of displaying an image according to the effect type on the effect display device 9 when the operation acceptance period of the push button ends is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, even during the push button operation acceptance period, if the meter corresponding to repeated hits is in the final mode, an image corresponding to the effect type is displayed on the effect display device 9 without waiting for the end of the push button operation acceptance period. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation of the first push button and the second push button is accepted in the sixth round during the big hit game, and the image (probability change notification image or non-probability change notification image) according to the production type is displayed. , However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reception of the operation of the first push button and the second push button and the display of the image according to the effect type are respectively. It may be performed in different rounds.

When the push button operation is being accepted in S430 (S430; Y), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the first push button is operated (S441). When there is an operation of the first push button (S441; Y), a button LED light emitting process (S442) for causing the first push button to emit light and a vibration motor for driving the first push button (vibration) are performed. The vibration motor drive process (S443) to be caused is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, when the first push button is operated regardless of whether it is long-pressed or repeatedly hit during the push button operation acceptance period, the first push button emits light and vibrates during the operation period. , When the operation of the first push button is interrupted, the light emission and vibration of the first push button are stopped, but the present invention is not limited to this, and during the push button operation acceptance period. , The light emitting mode and the vibration mode of the first push button may be different depending on whether or not the first push button is operated.

Then, it is determined whether or not the flag for determining whether or not the first push button is long-pressed is set (S444). If the first push button long press determination flag is set (S444; Y), the process proceeds to S448, and if the first push button long press determination flag is not set (S444; N), the number of repeated hits is set. The value of the counter is incremented by +1 (S445), the flag for determining long press of the first push button is set, and the process proceeds to S448 (S446).

In S448, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not there is an operation of the second push button. When there is an operation of the second push button (S448; Y), a button LED light emitting process (S442) for causing the first push button to emit light and a vibration motor for driving the first push button (vibration) are performed. The vibration motor drive process (S443) to be caused is executed. Then, it is determined whether or not the flag for determining whether or not the first push button is long-pressed is set (S444). If the first push button long press determination flag is set (S444; Y), the process proceeds to S448, and if the first push button long press determination flag is not set (S444; N), the number of repeated hits is set. The value of the counter is incremented by +1 (S445), the flag for determining long press of the first push button is set, and the process proceeds to S448 (S446).

When it is determined in S441 that there is no operation of the first push button (S441; N), if the first push button long press determination flag is set, the first push button long press determination flag is set. Clear and proceed to S448 (S447).

In S448, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not there is an operation of the second push button. When there is an operation of the second push button (S448; Y), it is determined whether or not the flag for determining whether or not the second push button is long-pressed is set. Judgment (S449). If the second push button long press determination flag is set (S449; Y), the process proceeds to S453, and if the second push button long press determination flag is not set (S449; N), the number of repeated hits is set. The counter value is incremented by +1 (S450), the second push button long press determination flag is set, and the process proceeds to S453 (S451).

When it is determined in S448 that there is no operation of the second push button (S448; N), if the second push button long press determination flag is set, the second push button long press determination flag is set. Clear and proceed to S453 (S452).

In S453, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not both the first push button long press determination flag and the second push button long press determination flag are set. When both the first push button long press determination flag and the second push button long press determination flag are set (S453; Y), the process proceeds to S461, and the first push button long press determination flag and the second push button long press determination flag are set. When both the push button long press determination flag is not set, or only one of the first push button long press determination flag and the second push button long press determination flag is set (S453; N). ) Further determines whether or not the first push button long press determination flag is set (S454).

If the first push button long press determination flag is set (S454; Y), the process proceeds to S456, and if the first push button long press determination flag is not set (S454; N), the process further proceeds. It is determined whether or not the second push button long press determination flag is set (S455). If the second push button long press determination flag is set (S455; Y), the process proceeds to S456, and if the second push button long press determination flag is not set (S455; N), the jackpot game End the middle production process.

In S456, the effect control CPU 101 has the first push button long press determination flag set (S454; Y) or the second push button long press determination flag set (S455; Y). Based on the above, the long-press determination timer is incremented by 1 (S456), and it is determined whether or not the value of the long-press determination timer has reached the auto-continuous hit determination value (S457). When the value of the long press determination timer becomes the auto continuous hit determination value (S457; Y), the process proceeds to S463. If the value of the long press determination timer is not the automatic continuous hit determination value (S457; N), the jackpot middle effect processing is terminated.

Further, in S461, the effect control CPU 101 sets the long press determination timer based on the fact that both the first push button long press determination flag and the second push button long press determination flag are set (S453; Y). Whether the value is incremented by 1 and the value of the long press determination timer becomes an auto-continuous hit determination value in which the long press operation of the first push button and the second push button is regarded as the operation of the first push button and the second push button. It is determined whether or not (S462). When the value of the long press determination timer becomes the auto continuous hit determination value in S457 or S462 (S462 or S457; Y), the value of the long press determination timer is set to "0" (S463), and the auto continuous hit count counter. The value of is incremented by +1 (S464), and the process proceeds to S465. If the value of the long press determination timer in S462 is not the automatic continuous hit determination value (S392; N), the process proceeds to S465 without going through S463 and S464. The long press determination timer (long press determination timer for determining that both the first push button and the second push button are long pressed) in S461 is a long press determination timer (+1 in S456). It is the same timer as the long press determination timer for determining the long press of only one of the first push button and the 21st push button 32), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first push button is not limited to this. A long-press determination timer for determining that both the first push button and the second push button are long-pressed, and a long-press determination timer for determining that only one of the first push button and the 21st push button 32 is long-pressed. May be different long-press determination timers.

Then, in S465, the effect control CPU 101 updates the display mode of the continuous stroke corresponding meter according to the value of the sum of the continuous stroke count counter and the automatic continuous stroke count counter, and ends the advance notice effect process.

That is, in the notification effect of the present embodiment, when the automatic repeated hitting of the first push button is started in the state where the value of the automatic repeated hitting count counter is added based on the automatic repeated hitting of the second push button, the first The value of the auto-continuous hit count counter added based on the auto-continuous hit of the two push buttons is inherited by the auto-continuous hit of the first push button.

Further, when the automatic repeated hitting of the second push button is started in the state where the value of the automatic repeated hitting counter is added based on the automatic repeated hitting of the first push button, the automatic repeated hitting of the first push button is performed. The added value of the automatic repeated hit count counter is inherited by the automatic repeated hit of the second push button.

Furthermore, when the first push button and the second push button are held down at the same time, the value of the auto-continuous hit count counter is the same as when one of the first push button and the second push button is held down. Addition is done. On the other hand, when the player repeatedly executes (continuously hits) both the operations of the first push button and the second push button, both the operation of the first push button and the operation of the second push button are repeated. Based on this, the value of the repeated hit count counter is added.

That is, in the notification effect of the present embodiment, when the first push button and the second push button are held down at the same time, one of the first push button and the second push button is held down. When the number of meters corresponding to repeated hits increases at the same speed and the player repeatedly executes (continuously hits) both the operations of the first push button and the second push button, the player performs the first push button and the first push button. 2 The meter corresponding to repeated hits is updated faster than the case where one operation with the push button is repeatedly executed (continuous hits). When the player repeatedly executes both the operations of the first push button and the second push button, it depends on the speed at which the player repeatedly hits the first push button 31B and the speed at which the second push button is repeatedly hit. Is different.

As described above, in the advance notice effect and the notification effect in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 28 (A), 28 (B), 31 (A), and 31 (B), the player pushes. If only one of the first push button and the second push button is repeatedly hit during the button operation acceptance period, the display of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is updated for each operation of the first push button and the second push button. Eventually, the meter for repeated hits becomes full (final mode). Further, as shown in FIGS. 27 (A), 28 (C), and 31 (C), when the player repeatedly hits both the first push button and the second push button during the push button operation acceptance period. Is to update the display of the meter corresponding to repeated hits for each operation of the first push button and the second push button, so that the player can use the first push button and the second push button during the push button operation acceptance period. The meter for repeated hits fills up (final mode) faster than when only one is hit repeatedly.

In the notice effect and the notification effect in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 29 (A), 29 (B), 32 (A), and 32 (B), the player accepts the push button operation. When only one of the 1st push button and the 2nd push button is pressed and held inside, the 1st push button and the 2nd push are made when the automatic repeated hits are established based on the long pressing of the 1st push button and the 2nd push button. The display of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is gradually updated on condition that the long press of the button is continued, and a predetermined period (for example,) after the player starts pressing and holding the first push button or the second push button. Based on the elapse of the long push period L1) shown in FIGS. 29 (A), 29 (B), 32 (A), and 32 (B), the meter for repeated hits is finally full (final mode). Become.

Further, in the advance notice effect and the notification effect in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 27 (A), 30 (A), and 33 (A), the player first receives the push button operation during the operation acceptance period. When both the push button and the second push button are pressed and held, the player automatically presses and holds only one of the first push button and the second push button during the push button operation acceptance period. The display of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is gradually updated on the condition that the continuous hits are established and both the first push button and the second push button are continuously pressed, and the player becomes the first push button. Based on the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, the long press period L1 shown in FIGS. 30 (A) and 33 (A)) after the start of both long presses with the second push button, the meter finally supports repeated hits. Is full (final mode). That is, in the advance notice effect and the notification effect of the present embodiment, when the player presses and holds both the first push button and the second push button during the push button operation acceptance period, the player presses the push button. It is considered that one of the first push button and the second push button was pressed and held during the operation acceptance period of the player, and the player pressed the first push button and the second push button during the operation acceptance period of the push button. The determination of automatic repeated hits is executed at the same speed as when one of the push buttons is pressed and held, and the player presses either the first push button or the second push button for a long time during the push button operation acceptance period. The meter for repeated hits is updated to full (final mode) at the same speed as when pushing.

In the advance notice effect in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27 (A), when one of the first push button and the second push button is long-pressed and then the other long-press is executed (FIG. 30 (B). ) Indicates a form in which the second push button is long-pressed after the first push button is long-pressed.) If one long-press is switched to the other long-press before the auto-continuous hit is established, the long-press auto-continuous hit is performed. The judgment is to be redone. Further, as shown in FIGS. 27 (A) and 30 (B), after executing the automatic continuous hitting corresponding to the long pressing of either the first push button or the second push button, the other long pressing is performed. When switching to the execution of automatic repeated hits, the value of the automatic repeated hits counter is reset to "0" when the push button to be long-pressed is switched, so either the first push button or the second push button The number of automatic repeated hits during the period during which one was held down (long press period L2 shown in FIG. 30 (B); L1> L2) and the period during which the other was held down (long press period shown in FIG. 30 (B)). Even if the total of the number of automatic repeated hits in L3; L1> L3) reaches the number of automatic repeated hits in the predetermined period (long press period L1), the continuous hit compatible meter is not updated to full (final mode).

However, in the notification effect of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27 (A), when one of the first push button and the second push button is held down and then the other is held down (FIG. 33). (B) exemplifies a form in which the second push button is long-pressed after the first push button is long-pressed). If one long-press is switched to the other long-press before the automatic continuous hit is established, the long-press auto is performed. It is possible to take over the judgment of repeated hits. Further, as shown in FIGS. 27 (A) and 33 (B), after executing the automatic continuous hitting corresponding to the long pressing of either the first push button or the second push button, the other long pressing is performed. When switching to the execution of automatic repeated hits, the value of the automatic repeated hits counter is not reset to "0" even if the push button to be long-pressed is switched, so either the first push button or the second push button is used. The number of automatic repeated hits during the period during which the button was held down (long press period L2 shown in FIG. 30B) and the number of automatic repeated hits during the period during which the other was held down (long press period L3 shown in FIG. 30B). When the sum of and has reached the number of automatic continuous hits in the predetermined period (long press period L1), the continuous hit compatible meter is updated to full (final mode).

Assuming that the meter corresponding to repeated hits in the notification effect is a meter that is updated to full tank (final mode) by repeated hits of the first push button and the second push button a specific number of times (for example, 20 times) or automatic repeated hits for a specific number of times. Since the first repeated hits are counted at the timing when the long press of the 1 push button or the 2nd push button is started, long press one of the 1st push button and the 2nd push button for the long press period L2. If the other is pressed and held for the long press period L3, then only one of the first push button and the second push button is pressed and held for the long press period L1 at a timing one auto-repeated hit earlier. The meter for repeated hits is updated to full (final mode).

Focusing on the case where the first push button is operated by the player and the case where the second push button is operated during each production, as shown in FIG. 27 (B), the first push button is operated by the player. When is operated, since the first push button has a button LED (not shown) and a vibration motor (not shown) built-in, the button LED emits light and the first push button vibrates by driving the vibration motor. On the other hand, when the second push button is operated by the player, the second push button does not emit light or vibrate because the member corresponding to the button LED and the vibration motor is not built in. That is, when the vibration motor is vibrating by its own drive, the player can strongly sense the vibration of the vibration motor by operating the first push button, while the vibration of the vibration motor causes the game frame. Since a part of the vibration is transmitted to the second push button, the player can perceive the vibration of the vibration motor by operating the second push button weaker than when operating the first push button.

However, since the same determination value (automatic continuous hit determination value) is used when the first push button is long-pressed by the player and when the second push button is long-pressed, the player makes the first push. The interval at which automatic repeated hits are established (long press determination interval) is the same (for example, 0.2 seconds shown in FIG. 27 (B)) when the button is pressed and held and when the second push button is pressed and held. It has become.

That is, as described above, in the advance notice effect, after the player presses and holds the first push button for a first period (for example, 0.15 seconds) shorter than the long press determination interval, the long press determination interval When the second push button is pressed and held for a short second period (for example, 0.05 seconds), the total of the first period and the second period has reached the long press determination interval. The automatic continuous hitting is not executed, and the display mode of the continuous hitting compatible meter is not updated.

On the other hand, in the notification effect, the player presses and holds the first push button for a first period (for example, 0.15 seconds) shorter than the long press determination interval, and then the second push button is shorter than the long press determination interval. When the second push button is pressed and held for a period (for example, 0.05 seconds), the automatic repeated hits are performed based on the fact that the total of the first period and the second period has reached the long press determination interval. It is executed and the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is updated.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27 (A), a mode in which the long press determination can be taken over is illustrated in the notification effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the notification effect, the takeover of the long press determination may be invalidated as in the advance notice effect. Further, in the present embodiment, the first period in the present invention is 0.15 seconds and the second period is 0.05 seconds. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first period and the second period may be of the same length.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the advance notice effect and the notification effect, the player can repeatedly hit the button by pressing and holding both the first push button and the second push button. The display mode of the meter is updated, and the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is updated by the automatic continuous hitting based on the player pressing and holding only one of the first push button and the second push button. As shown in FIGS. 22, 23, 25 and 26, for each interruption regardless of whether both the first push button and the second push button are held down or only one of them is held down. Since the value of the auto-continuous hit count counter always adds only 1, the case where the player presses and holds both the first push button and the second push button and the case where the player presses and holds both the first push button and the second push button. The update speed of the meter for repeated hits is the same as when pressing and holding only.

On the other hand, there is a case where the player updates the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits by repeatedly hitting both the first push button and the second push button, and a case where the player updates either the first push button or the second push button. In the case of updating the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits by repeatedly hitting only, as shown in FIGS. 22 and 25, the operation of the first push button and the operation of the second push button are always performed for each interruption. Since the value of the repeated hit count counter is added by 1 for each, only one of the case where the player repeatedly hits both the first push button and the second push button and the case where the player repeatedly hits the first push button and the second push button. The meter corresponding to repeated hits can be updated faster when the player repeatedly hits both the first push button and the second push button. As described above, in the present embodiment, the update speed of the continuous hit compatible meter is made different depending on whether the player's operation detected by the first push button and the second push button is a continuous hit or a long press. It is possible to improve the effect of the advance notice effect and the notification effect.

In the present embodiment, the case where the player presses and holds both the first push button and the second push button and the case where the player presses and holds only one of the first push button and the second push button. The present invention is not limited to this, and the player presses and holds both the first push button and the second push button, although the embodiment in which the update speeds of the meters corresponding to repeated hits are the same is illustrated. The update speed of the meter corresponding to repeated hits may be different depending on whether the player presses and holds only one of the first push button and the second push button.

Further, in the present embodiment, there are cases where the player repeatedly hits both the first push button and the second push button and cases where the player repeatedly hits only one of the first push button and the second push button. , However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to the case where the player repeatedly hits both the first push button and the second push button, and the game. The update speed of the meter corresponding to repeated hits may be the same in the case where the person repeatedly hits only one of the first push button and the second push button.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the player presses and holds both the first push button and the second push button and the case where the player presses and holds only one of the first push button and the second push button. Then, the update "speed" of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is made the same, and the case where the player repeatedly hits both the first push button and the second push button and the case where the player repeatedly hits both the first push button and the second push button An example is shown in which the update "speed" of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is different depending on the case where only one is hit repeatedly, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the player pushes the first push button and the second push. When both the buttons are pressed and held, and when the player presses and holds only one of the first push button and the second push button, an image (image A or image B in the advance notice effect) is displayed on the effect display device 9. The "speed" until the probability change notification image and the non-probability change notification image in the notification effect are displayed is the same, and the player repeatedly hits both the first push button and the second push button, and the player is the first. When only one of the 1 push button and the 2nd push button is repeatedly pressed, an image (image A and image B in the advance notice effect, a probability change notification image and a non-probability change notification image in the notification effect) is displayed on the effect display device 9. The "speed" up to the point may be different. That is, the "quickness" in the present invention includes the "speed (update speed)" in which the meter corresponding to repeated hits is updated by the operation of the first push button and the second push button, as well as the first push button and the second push button. Includes "speed (period until image display)" until an image (image A or image B in the advance notice effect, probabilistic notification image or non-probability change notification image in the notification effect) is displayed on the effect display device 9 by the operation of. It has been.

Further, in the advance notice effect and the notification effect, when the player presses and holds only the first push button and when only the second push button is pressed and held, as shown in FIG. 27 (B), automatic continuous hitting is established. Since the interval (long press judgment interval) is the same as 0.2 seconds, the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is updated by the automatic repeated hits based on the player pressing and holding only the first push button. , When the player updates the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits by auto-continuous hitting based on pressing and holding only the second push button, the update speed of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is the same, so that the advance notice effect and the notification effect are produced. Can be easily understood by the player, and the effect of the advance notice effect and the notification effect can be enhanced.

In the present embodiment, an example is illustrated in which the update speed of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is the same when the player presses and holds only the first push button and when only the second push button is pressed and held. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the update speed of the meter corresponding to repeated hits differs depending on whether the player presses and holds only the first push button and the second push button. You may do so.

Further, in the advance notice effect, the player presses and holds the first push button for a first period (for example, 0.15 seconds) shorter than the long press determination interval, and then a second period shorter than the long press determination interval. When the second push button is pressed and held for (for example, 0.05 seconds), automatic continuous hitting is executed even though the total of the first period and the second period has reached the long press determination interval. Since the display mode of the meter for repeated hits is not updated, it can be easily understood that the update of the display mode of the meter for continuous hits is not started by changing the push button that the player presses and holds. The effect of the production can be enhanced.

In the present embodiment, in the advance notice effect, the long press determination interval is performed after the player presses and holds the first push button for a first period (for example, 0.15 seconds) shorter than the long press determination interval. When the second push button is pressed and held for a shorter second period (for example, 0.05 seconds), the long press of the second push button does not take over the long press period of the first push button. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the player presses and holds the first push button for a first period shorter than the long press determination interval in the advance notice effect. When the second push button is long-pressed for a second period shorter than the determination interval, the long-pressing period of the first push button may be taken over by the long-pressing of the second push button.

In addition, in the notification effect, the player presses and holds the first push button for a first period (for example, 0.15 seconds) shorter than the long press determination interval, and then a second period shorter than the long press determination interval. When the second push button is pressed and held for (for example, 0.05 seconds), automatic continuous hitting is executed according to the total of the first period and the second period reaching the long press determination interval. Since the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is updated, the effect of the notification effect can be enhanced.

In the present embodiment, in the notification effect, the long press determination interval is performed after the player presses and holds the first push button for a first period (for example, 0.15 seconds) shorter than the long press determination interval. When the second push button is pressed and held for a shorter second period (for example, 0.05 seconds), the long press of the second push button takes over the long press period of the first push button. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the long press determination is made after the player presses and holds the first push button for a first period shorter than the long press determination interval in the notification effect. When the second push button is long-pressed for a second period shorter than the interval, the long-pressing period of the first push button may not be inherited by the long-pressing of the second push button.

Further, in the advance notice effect and the notification effect of the present embodiment, the image of the first push button and the first push as the operation promotion image on the effect display device 9 during the operation acceptance period of the first push button and the second push button. By displaying a message prompting the operation (continuous hitting) of the button, the player can be prompted to operate the first push button, and the effect of the advance notice effect and the notification effect can be enhanced.

Further, the first push button of the present embodiment has a built-in vibration motor, and when the first push button is operated in the advance notice effect or the notification effect, the first push is driven (vibration) of the vibration motor. While the button vibrates, the vibration motor does not drive (vibrate) when the second push button is operated in the advance notice effect or the notification effect, so that the second push button does not vibrate, that is, the first push. Since the strength of the vibration differs between the button and the second push button, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect and the notification effect.

In this embodiment, the first push button vibrates by the drive (vibration) of the built-in vibration motor, and the second push button does not vibrate, as "the strength of vibration is different". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the vibration motor is driven (vibrated) in response to the operation of the second push button, and the vibration generated by the vibration motor is transmitted to the second push button. The push button may vibrate weaker than the first push button.

Further, in the present embodiment, the embodiment in which the vibration motor is built in the first push button and the vibration motor is not built in the second push button is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second push button is not limited to this. While the push button has a built-in vibration motor, the first push button does not have a built-in vibration motor. When the second push button is operated by the player, when the first push button is operated by the player. The second push button may vibrate more strongly than the second push button.

Further, in the present embodiment, a mode in which the vibration motor is built in the first push button and the vibration motor is not built in the second push button is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first A vibration motor may be built in both the push button and the second push button. When the vibration motor is built in both the first push button and the second push button in this way, the performance of the vibration motor built in the first push button and the vibration motor built in the second push button is performed. The strength of the vibration of the first push button and the second push button may be different by making them different.

In the present embodiment, in the advance notice effect and the notification effect, the player presses and holds the first push button and the length of the second push button during the operation acceptance period of the first push button and the second push button. An example is illustrated in which the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is updated by automatic repeated hits in response to pressing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation acceptance period of the first push button or the second push button is used. Even if there is, if the operation of the first push button or the operation of the second push button by the player is detected after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the operation acceptance period, the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits by automatic repeated hits. May not be updated until the final mode, so that the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits may not be updated. By doing so, even during the operation acceptance period of the first push button and the second push button, the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is the final mode by the automatic repeated hits by long pressing the first push button and the second push button. Since it is possible to provide a case where the game is updated and a case where the game is not updated, the game entertainment can be improved. If the operation of the first push button or the operation of the second push button by the player is detected from the start of the operation acceptance period to the elapse of a predetermined period, the meter corresponding to repeated hits is performed by automatic repeated hits as in the present embodiment. The display mode of is updated to the final mode.

Further, in the present invention, as an example of "the first effect of the first detection means has a stronger effect intensity than the first effect of the second detection means", the "image of the first push button" illustrated in the present embodiment is used. In addition to the form of "displaying but not displaying the image of the second push button", the form of "displaying the image of the second push button smaller than the image of the first push button" is included. Similarly, as an example of "the second effect related to the first detection means has a stronger effect intensity than the second effect related to the second detection means", the "message prompting the operation of the first push button" illustrated in the present embodiment is used. In addition to the form of "displaying but not displaying the message prompting the operation of the second push button", the form of "displaying the message prompting the operation of the second push button smaller than the message prompting the first push button" Includes. Further, the effect intensity in the present invention includes the size and presence / absence of the image displayed on the effect display device 9, the volume / presence / absence of the sound output from the speaker 27, the amount of light output from the decorative LED 25 and the frame LED 28. Including the strength and presence / absence of.

When the configuration shown in the present embodiment is applied to the configuration shown in the first embodiment, for example, when both the brightness adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are performed at the same time during the automatic continuous striking. In addition, according to the same process as in the first embodiment, the brightness or the volume may be adjusted with priority given to either the brightness or the volume. Further, for example, when both the brightness adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are performed at the same time immediately after the stick controller, the first push button, and the second push button are operated, any of the operating means can be operated. The brightness or the volume may be adjusted by giving priority to either the brightness or the volume depending on whether the brightness or the volume has just been performed. In this case, for example, immediately after the stick controller is tilted, the brightness adjustment is prioritized, or immediately after the first push button or the second push button is pressed. For example, the volume adjustment may be prioritized.

It is also possible to configure the game machine by appropriately combining the configurations shown in the first embodiment to the second embodiment shown above.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the board on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted, but the circuit for controlling the effect device is provided. May be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 27, etc.) are mounted. Two boards may be provided with the effect control board of 2.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the game control microcomputer 560 uses another substrate (for example, the figure). For the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, etc. shown in 2, or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the voice output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). The effect control command may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. The effect control microcomputer 100 that controls the effect display device 9 by executing control related to voice control and lamp control according to the operation, and further changing the received command to the command as it is or, for example, a simplified command. You may send it to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs display control in response to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in each of the above embodiments, and similarly, the sound output board 70 and the lamp Display control can be performed according to a command received from the driver board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, "different ratios" are not limited to those having different ratios due to relationships such as A: B = 70%: 30% and A: B = 30%: 70%. , A: B = 100%: 0%, and the ratios are different (that is, one is 100% allocated and the other is 0%).

Further, in each of the above embodiments, for example, a plurality of types of special symbols and effect symbols of "1" to "9" and a plurality of types of ordinary symbols of "○" and "×" are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. However, the variable display is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the variably displayed symbol and the derived symbol do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the variably displayed symbol may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol is derived and displayed at the end. It may be a thing.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the game machine, but in the present invention, a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types are used according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player, if the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. It is also possible to do.

Further, the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize, and a game medium such as a game ball is enclosed and a score is given when the condition for giving the prize is satisfied. It can also be applied to a type of gaming machine.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, there are probabilistic jackpots and normal jackpots as jackpot types, and based on the determination that the jackpot types are probabilistic jackpots, a gaming machine that is controlled to a probabilistic state after the jackpot game is completed is shown. However, it is not limited to such a game machine. For example, a special variable winning ball device provided with a predetermined probability variation region inside (a probability variation region may be provided in a special variable winning ball device provided with only one, or a plurality of special variable winning balls provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the game ball passing through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the jackpot game, and the jackpot game It is also possible to apply the configuration shown in each of the above embodiments to the gaming machine controlled to the probabilistic state after the end.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is another gaming machine capable of playing a game, and is a volume adjusting operation means for adjusting the volume (for example, an upward pressing operation unit 130a of the cross key 130 and a lower part). The volume is based on the operation of the direction operation unit 130b), the brightness adjustment operation means for adjusting the brightness (for example, the left direction pressing operation unit 130c and the right direction operation unit 130d of the cross key 130), and the volume adjustment operation means. The adjustment means includes an adjustment means (for example, a portion for executing step S800A in the effect control microcomputer 100) capable of executing a process of performing adjustment and a process of performing brightness adjustment based on an operation on the brightness adjustment operation means. When the volume lowering operation by the volume adjusting operation means and the brightness increasing operation by the brightness adjusting operation means are performed, the volume lowering process is preferentially executed (for example, step S4009 in the effect control microcomputer 100). , The part that executes S4010. See the process of timing T1 shown in FIG. 20. Further, the detection means (for example, push sensor 9035B, controller sensor unit 9035A, etc.) capable of detecting the movement of the player, and the movement of the player A specific effect (for example, a character accessory) based on a promotion display execution means (for example, an image display device 905 capable of displaying a button image 90201 or a controller image 90203) and a detection result of the detection means. The specific effect executing means (for example, the effect control board 9012, etc.) capable of executing the effect) is provided, and the specific effect executing means includes at least the first specific effect (for example, the first character accessory motion effect, etc.). It is possible to execute a second specific effect different from the first specific effect (for example, a second character accessory movement effect, etc.), and the promotion display executing means executes the first specific effect as the promotion display. The suggested first promotion display (for example, an effect in which the button image 90201 and the first character image 90211 are displayed on the image display device 905 as shown in FIG. 45 (C-2)) and the second specific effect are executed. It is possible to execute a second promotion display (for example, an effect in which the button image 90201 and the second character image 90212 are displayed on the image display device 905, as shown in FIG. 47 (C-3)). A game machine that is.

According to such a configuration, when the operation of lowering the volume and the operation of increasing the brightness are performed, the process of lowering the volume is preferentially executed, and the process of adjusting either the volume or the brightness is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered. In addition, since it is suggested that a specific effect is performed in the promotion display, it is possible to improve the interest of the game effect.

Alternatively, the gaming machine of the present invention is another gaming machine capable of playing a game, and is a volume adjusting operation means for adjusting the volume (for example, the upward pressing operation unit 130a of the cross key 130). And downward operation unit 130b), brightness adjustment operation means for performing brightness adjustment (for example, left direction pressing operation unit 130c and right direction operation unit 130d of the cross key 130), and volume adjustment operation means. It is provided with an adjusting means (for example, a portion for executing step S800A in the effect control microcomputer 100) capable of executing a process of adjusting the volume and a process of adjusting the brightness based on the operation of the brightness adjusting operating means. When the operation of lowering the brightness by the brightness adjusting operation means and the operation of raising the volume by the volume adjusting operation means are performed, the means preferentially executes the process of lowering the brightness (for example, in the effect control microcomputer 100). A portion for executing steps S4011 and S4012; refer to the process of timing T2 shown in FIG. 20), a detection means capable of detecting the movement of the player (for example, push sensor 9035B, controller sensor unit 9035A, etc.), and the player. A specific effect (for example, a character) based on a promotion display execution means (for example, an image display device 905 capable of displaying a button image 90201 or a controller image 90203) capable of executing a promotion display for prompting the operation of the detection means and a detection result of the detection means. The specific effect executing means (for example, the effect control board 9012, etc.) capable of executing the character effect, etc.) is provided, and the specific effect executing means is at least the first specific effect (for example, the first character character motion effect, etc.). And a second specific effect (for example, a second character accessory motion effect, etc.) different from the first specific effect can be executed, and the promotion display executing means executes the first specific effect as the promotion display. A first promotion display (for example, an effect in which the button image 90201 and the first character image 90211 are displayed on the image display device 905 as shown in FIG. 45 (C-2)) and a second specific effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 47 (C-3), an effect in which the button image 90201 and the second character image 90212 are displayed on the image display device 905, etc.) and the second promotion display suggesting that Examples include playable gaming machines.

According to such a configuration, when the operation of increasing the volume and the operation of decreasing the brightness are performed, the process of lowering the brightness is preferentially executed, and the process of adjusting either the volume or the brightness is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered. In addition, since it is suggested that a specific effect is performed in the promotion display, it is possible to improve the interest of the game effect.

An operation means for adjusting the volume and brightness (for example, the cross key 130) and an operation means (for example, the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B) for the operation performed by the player for executing the specific effect. May be configured by a separate operating means, or may be configured by a common operating means. If it is configured by a separate operation means, it can be suitably handled even when the player wants to adjust the volume or the brightness during the period in which the promotion display prompting the player's movement is performed (that is, the operation valid period). .. Further, if it is configured by a common operating means, the number of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where it is configured by a separate operating means, and it becomes easy to reduce the cost. In addition, when it is configured by a common operation means, the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment cannot be performed during the period when the promotion display for prompting the player's operation is performed (that is, the operation valid period). It is desirable to prevent erroneous operations (volume adjustment, brightness adjustment, etc. are performed against the player's will).

Further, as an example of a form of a game machine capable of preventing a decrease in the effect of the effect and improving the interest of the game effect, a game machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko game machine). A detection means (for example, push sensor 9035B, controller sensor unit 9035A, etc.) that can detect the movement of the player and a promotion display execution means (for example, 901, etc.) that can execute the promotion display that encourages the movement of the player. , An image display device 905 capable of displaying a button image 90201 or a controller image 90203) and a specific effect executing means (for example, a character character effect) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a character character effect) based on the detection result of the detection means. , The effect control board 9012, etc.), and the specific effect executing means is at least a first specific effect (for example, a first character accessory motion effect, etc.) and a second specific effect (for example) different from the first specific effect. For example, it is possible to execute a second character accessory motion effect, etc.), and the promotion display executing means has a first promotion display (for example, FIG. As shown in 45 (C-2), the effect of displaying the button image 90201 and the first character image 90211 on the image display device 905) and the second promotion suggesting that the second specific effect is executed. Examples thereof include a gaming machine capable of performing display (for example, as shown in FIG. 47 (C-3), an effect such as displaying a button image 90201 and a second character image 90212 on the image display device 905). Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this game machine will be described as another form example.

(Example of other forms)
Hereinafter, other form examples will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 34 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment, showing the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is roughly classified into a gaming board 902 that constitutes the game board surface and a gaming machine frame 903 that supports and fixes the game board 902. The game board 902 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. A game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device into this game area.

A first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 902. Each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs, and in a special symbol game as an example of a variable display game, a plurality of types that can be identified from each other. The special symbol, which is the identification information of the LED, is displayed in a variable manner. For example, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B can variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", respectively. To do.

The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". However, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns having different combinations of those to be turned on and those to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be preset as a plurality of types of special symbols. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". ..

An image display device 905 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 902. The image display device 905 is composed of, for example, an LCD or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effects images. In the display area of the image display device 905, the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B in the special symbol game are supported. In a decorative symbol display area that is a plurality of variable display units such as three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each are variably displayed. The variable display of this decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

As an example, in the display area of the image display device 905, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are arranged. Then, in the special symbol game, one of the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A and the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B is started. The variation of the decorative symbol is started in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. After that, when the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the "left", "middle", and "right" on the image display device 905 are displayed. , The finalized decorative symbol, which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed.

As described above, in the display area of the image display device 905, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A or the special figure using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B. In synchronization with the game, a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified by each are variably displayed, and a fixed decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed. In addition, to derive and display various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means to stop and display the identification information such as the decorative symbol and end the variable display. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result, the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol becomes "0" and the decoration is displayed. The design may be stagnant and displayed, and may be in a display state that causes slight shaking, expansion and contraction, for example. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not definitively displayed, the player can recognize that the change of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. It should be noted that the temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbol completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

A start winning prize storage display area 905H is arranged on the screen of the image display device 905. In the start winning prize storage display area 905H, a hold storage display for identifiablely displaying the number of hold of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed. Here, in the hold of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game, the game ball passes through the first starting winning opening formed by the ordinary winning ball device 906A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B. It occurs based on the starting prize by doing. That is, although the start conditions for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative symbol are satisfied, the variable display game based on the previously satisfied start condition is being executed and the pachinko game machine 901 is running. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the control of the jackpot game state or the like, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended.

For example, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is satisfied due to the occurrence of the first start prize in which the game ball passes through the first start winning opening, the first 1 If the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the start condition is not satisfied, the number of stored first special figures is added by 1, and the first special figure is used. The execution of the special figure game that was there is suspended. In addition, when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B is satisfied due to the occurrence of the second start prize in which the game ball passes through the second start winning opening, the first 2 If the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the start condition is not satisfied, the number of the second special figure reserved storage is added by 1, and the second special figure is used. The execution of the special figure game that was there is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the number of stored special figures of the first special figure is subtracted by 1, and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started. At that time, the number of the second special figure reserved storage is subtracted by 1.

The variable display hold memory number obtained by adding the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number is also particularly referred to as a total hold memory number. The term "special figure reserved memory" usually refers to a concept including all of the first special figure reserved memory, the second special figure reserved memory, and the total reserved memory, but in particular, it refers to a part of these. It shall be possible.

A display for displaying the number of reserved special figures may be provided together with the start winning prize storage display area 905H or in place of the start winning prize storage display area 905H. In the example shown in FIG. 34, together with the start winning prize storage display area 905H, the first hold for identifiable display of the number of special figure hold storages on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. A display device 9025A and a second hold display device 9025B are provided. The first hold display 9025A displays the number of hold storages of the first special figure in a identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 9025B displays the number of second special figure hold storage identifiable. The first hold indicator 9025A and the second hold indicator 9025B are configured to include, for example, a number of LEDs corresponding to the upper limit values of the first special figure hold storage number and the second special figure hold storage number, respectively. ..

As shown in FIG. 34, the first character accessory 9061 is arranged in the vicinity of the upper end in the display area of the image display device 905. The first character accessory 9061 can be operated downward from the upper end of the image display device 905 toward the inside of the display area of the image display device 905 by driving the first character accessory motor 9071 shown in FIG. 35. At the same time, it is possible to rotate (rotate) at the operating position. Hereinafter, the position where the first character accessory 9061 is arranged in the vicinity of the upper end in the display area of the image display device 905 is referred to as the first character accessory first position P9011. Further, the position where the first character accessory 9061 is arranged inside the display area of the image display device 905 is referred to as the first character accessory second position P9012. A second character accessory 9062 is arranged in the vicinity of the left end in the display area of the image display device 905. The second character accessory 9062 can be operated slightly upward to the right from the left end of the image display device 905 toward the inside of the display area of the image display device 905 by driving the motor 9072 for the second character accessory shown in FIG. At the same time, it is possible to rotate (rotate) at the operating position. Hereinafter, the position where the second character accessory 9062 near the left end in the display area of the image display device 905 is arranged is referred to as the second character accessory first position P9021. Further, the position where the second character accessory 9062 is arranged inside the display area of the image display device 905 is referred to as the second character accessory second position P9022. A third character accessory 9063 is arranged in the vicinity of the right end in the display area of the image display device 905. The third character accessory 9063 can be operated slightly upward to the left from the left end of the image display device 905 toward the inside of the display area of the image display device 905 by driving the third character accessory motor 9073 shown in FIG. At the same time, it is possible to rotate (rotate) at the operating position. Hereinafter, the position where the third character accessory 9063 is arranged in the vicinity of the right end in the display area of the image display device 905 is referred to as the third character accessory first position P9031. Further, the position where the third character accessory 9063 is arranged inside the display area of the image display device 905 is referred to as the third character accessory second position P9032.

In the following description, the first character accessory 9061 to the third character accessory 9063 may be collectively referred to as a "character accessory". In addition, the first position P9011 to the third character accessory first position P9031 may be collectively referred to as the "character accessory first position", and the first character accessory second position P9012 to the third character may be collectively referred to. The second position of the accessory P9032 may be collectively referred to as the "second position of the character accessory".

Below the image display device 905, a normal winning ball device 906A and a normal variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The ordinary winning ball device 906A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting region that is always kept in a constant open state by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. The ordinary variable winning ball device 906B is an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed to a closed state in a vertical position and an open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 9081 for an ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. To form a second start winning opening.

As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening. It becomes. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 906B, when the solenoid 9081 for the normal electric accessory is in the on state, the movable wing piece is in the tilting position, so that the game ball enters the second starting winning opening. It becomes a state. Although the normally variable winning ball device 906B allows the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening even when it is in the closed state, the possibility that the game ball will enter is lower than when it is in the open state. It may be configured as follows. As described above, the game area is provided with a normal variable winning ball device 906B that changes between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter.

The game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening formed in the ordinary winning ball device 906A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. 35. The game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. 35. If a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 9022A and the number of stored first special figures is equal to or less than the predetermined upper limit value, the first start is performed. The condition is met. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second start port switch 9022B, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and if the number of reserved second special figures is equal to or less than the predetermined upper limit value, the second start is performed. The condition is met.

The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 9022A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 9022B. May be the same number or different numbers from each other. The pachinko gaming machine 901 may directly pay out the game balls to be prize balls, or may give points corresponding to the number of game balls to be prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided below the ordinary winning ball device 906A and the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning ball device 907 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 9082 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. 35, and a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form a big prize opening as.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the large winning opening door is in the off state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening, and the game ball cannot pass through the large winning opening. .. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball easily passes through the large winning opening. To do. In this way, the large winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which the game ball easily passes and is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass and is disadvantageous to the player. In addition, instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass through the large winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball is difficult to pass through the large winning opening may be provided.

The game ball that has passed through the winning opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 9023 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 9023, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes through the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the game ball passes through another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls will be paid out. Therefore, if the large winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 907, the game ball can enter the large winning opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the large winning opening is closed or partially closed in the special variable winning ball device 907, it becomes impossible or difficult to pass the game ball through the large winning opening to obtain the winning ball, and the game It becomes a second state that is disadvantageous to the person.

A normal symbol display 9020 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 902. As an example, the ordinary symbol display device 9020 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like like the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and has a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. The normal symbol that is is displayed in a variable manner. Such a variable display of a normal symbol is called a normal symbol game. Above the normal symbol display 9020, the normal symbol hold display 9025C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal figure hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 9041.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 902 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball, and a large number of obstacle nails. Further, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be done. In this case, a predetermined number of game balls may be paid out as prize balls based on the fact that the game balls that have entered any of the general prize openings are detected by the predetermined general prize ball switch. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 903, and game effect lamps 909 are provided around the game area. Decorative LEDs may be arranged around each structure in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 901. At the lower right position of the game machine frame 903, a ball striking operation handle operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward a game area is provided. For example, the hitting ball operation handle adjusts the elastic force of the game ball according to the amount of operation by the player or the like.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 903 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. A plate is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 903, a lower plate is provided to hold the surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper plate so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

The member forming the lower plate can be tilted in the back, front, left, or right directions by the player holding it at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). A possible stick controller 9031A is attached. The stick controller 9031A includes an operation stick held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator hangs when the player holds the operation stick). There is. The trigger button can be instructed by a player holding the operation stick of the stick controller 9031A with an operating hand (for example, the left hand) and pushing and pulling the trigger button with a predetermined operating finger (for example, the index finger). It may be configured as follows. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button may be built in the operation stick.

A controller sensor unit 9035A (see FIG. 35) that detects a tilting operation with respect to the operation stick may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the lower part of the stick controller 9031A. For example, the controller sensor unit 9035A has two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged parallel to the board surface of the game board 902 on the left side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the side of the player facing the pachinko game machine 901. Four transmissive types that combine (pair) and two transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pair) arranged perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 902 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player's side. It may be configured to include a photo sensor.

The member forming the upper plate includes a push button 9031B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, above the stick controller 9031A) on the upper surface of the upper plate body. It is provided. The push button 9031B may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from the player. A push sensor 9035B (see FIG. 35) that detects a player's operation action performed on the push button 9031B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 9031B.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, a voice control board 9013, and a lamp control board 9014 as shown in FIG. 35. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is also equipped with a relay board 9015 or the like for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, a touch sensor board, and the like are arranged on the back surface of the game board 902 and the like in the pachinko game machine 901.

The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The main board 9011 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a function for setting a random number used in a special drawing game, a function for inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 9012 or the like. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to a hall management computer. Further, the main board 9011 controls the lighting / extinguishing of the LEDs and the like constituting the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B to control the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It also has a function to control the variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 9020 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 9020. ing.

For example, a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110, a solenoid circuit 90111, and the like are mounted on the main board 9011. The switch circuit 90110 takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting the game ball and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 90100. The solenoid circuit 90111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric accessory and the solenoid 9082 for the winning door.

The effect control board 9012 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 9011, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and receives an image display device 905, speakers 908L, and 908R. , And various circuits for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric parts such as the game effect lamp 909 and the decorative LED are mounted. That is, the effect control board 9012 includes all or part of the display operation of the image display device 905 and the sound output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, and all or one of the lighting / extinguishing operations of the game effect lamp 909, the decorative LED, and the like. It has a function of determining the control content for causing an electric component for effect such as a unit to execute a predetermined effect operation.

The audio control board 9013 is a control board for audio output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and outputs audio from the speakers 908L and 908R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. It is equipped with a processing circuit that executes audio signal processing for this purpose. The lamp control board 9014 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and is a game effect lamp 909, a decorative LED, etc. based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. It is equipped with a lamp driver circuit and the like for driving on / off.

As shown in FIG. 35, wirings for transmitting detection signals from various switches such as a gate switch 9021, start port switches 9022A, 9022B, and count switch 9023 are connected to the main board 9011. The various switches may have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a switch called a sensor. Further, a wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, the ordinary symbol display 9020, etc. is connected to the main board 9011.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 toward the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 905, a voice control command used to control sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and a game effect lamp 909. It includes lamp control commands used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like. Each of these effect control commands has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, in which the first byte represents MODE and the second byte represents EXT. The first bit of the MODE data may be set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data may be set to "0" in advance.

The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, a ROM 90101 that stores a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a RAM 90102 that provides a work area for game control. The computer 90103 includes a CPU 90103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, a random number circuit 90104 that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 90103, and an I / O 90105.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 executes a program read from the ROM 90101 to execute a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 90103 reads fixed data from the ROM 90101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 90103 writes various variable data to the RAM 90102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 90102 by the CPU 90103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 90103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105, and the CPU 90103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105. And transmission operations that output various signals are also performed.

The one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 90100 may have at least a RAM 90102 built in in addition to the CPU 90103, and the ROM 90101, the random number circuit 90104, the I / O 90105, and the like may be externally attached.

In the game control microcomputer 90100, for example, a random number circuit 90104 or the like counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling the progress of the game. Random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers. The game random number may be updated by hardware such as a random number circuit 90104, or may be updated by software when the CPU 90103 of the game control microcomputer 90100 executes a predetermined computer program. You may. For example, numerical data indicating a predetermined random value is stored in a random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100 or a random counter provided in an internal register separate from the RAM 90102, and the CPU 90103 The random value may be updated by updating the stored value periodically or irregularly.

The ROM 90101 included in the game control microcomputer 90100 stores various selection data, table data, and the like used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 90101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the CPU 90103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 90101 is configured with table data constituting a plurality of command tables used by the CPU 90103 to transmit control signals to be various control commands from the main board 9011 and a variation pattern table for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns. The table data to be used is stored. In the RAM 90102 included in the game control microcomputer 90100, various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are temporarily stored in a rewritable manner.

The effect control board 9012 includes an effect control CPU 90120 that performs control operations according to a program, a ROM 90121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, a RAM 90122 that provides a work area for the effect control CPU 90120, and an image display device. A display control unit 90123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the 905, a random number circuit 90124 that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the effect control CPU 90120, and an I / O 90125. And are installed.

As an example, in the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 90121 to execute the process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric components. At this time, the effect control CPU 90120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 90121, the effect control CPU 90120 writes various variation data to the RAM 90122 and temporarily stores the variation data, and the effect control CPU 90120 is stored in the RAM 90122. A variable data read operation for reading various temporarily stored variable data, a reception operation in which the effect control CPU 90120 receives input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 9012 via the I / O 90125, and an effect control CPU 90120 is I / A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012 via O90125 is also performed.

The effect control CPU 90120, ROM 90121, and RAM 90122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 9012. The effect control board 9012 has wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 905 and wiring for transmitting an effect sound signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the voice control board 9013. A wiring or the like for transmitting an illumination signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 9014. Further, on the effect control board 9012, wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the player's operation action to the stick controller 9031A has been detected from the controller sensor unit 9035A and a game for the push button 9031B A wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that a person's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 9035B is also connected. Further, the effect control board 9012 is used to drive the first character accessory motor 9071 to the third character accessory motor 9073 for operating and rotating the first character accessory 9061 to the third character accessory 9063, respectively. A wiring for transmitting a predetermined drive command signal to the motor drive circuit 9016 is also connected.

In the effect control board 9012, for example, a random number circuit 90124 or the like counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling the effect operation. The random number used to control such an effect operation is also called an effect random number.

The ROM 90121 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 35 stores various data tables and the like used for controlling the effect operation in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 90121 contains a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 90120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the determination tables, pattern data constituting various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered. The RAM 90122 mounted on the effect control board 9012 stores various data used for controlling the effect operation.

The display control unit 90123 mounted on the effect control board 9012 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 905 based on the display control command or the like from the effect control CPU 90120. For example, the display control unit 90123 controls for executing variable display of decorative symbols and various effect displays by determining the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 905. As an example, the display control unit 90123 may be equipped with a VDP, a CGROM, a VRAM, an LCD drive circuit, or the like. The VDP may be a GPU, GCL, or a microprocessor for image processing generally referred to as DSP. The CGROM may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. It may be configured.

The I / O 90125 mounted on the effect control board 9012 has, for example, an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 and the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012. And are included. For example, from the output port of the I / O 90125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 905, a command transmitted to the audio control board 9013, a command transmitted to the lamp control board 9014, and the like are output. ..

In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a predetermined game using a game ball as a game medium is performed, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. As an example of a game using a game ball, a launch motor included in a predetermined ball launching device based on a predetermined operation of a ball striking operation handle installed at the lower right of the front surface of the housing of the pachinko gaming machine 901. As a result, a game ball as a game medium is launched toward the game area. When the game ball that has flowed down the game area passes through the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 906A, the first starting is detected by the first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. 35 or the like. The condition is met. After that, based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state, the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is started. Will be done.

Further, when the game ball passes through the second start winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 906B, the second starting condition is satisfied because the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. 35. To do. After that, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state, the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B starts. Will be done. However, when the normally variable winning ball device 906B is in the closed state as the second state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the second starting winning opening.

Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 9041 is detected by the gate switch 9021 shown in FIG. 35, the normal symbol start condition for executing the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 9020 is established. After that, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 9020 is started based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied, for example, that the previous normal symbol game has ended. In this normal symbol game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the confirmed normal symbol, which is the variable display result of the normal symbol, is stopped and displayed. At this time, if a specific normal symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol loss". In response to the variable display result of the normal symbol being "per normal figure", the opening control is performed so that the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball device 906B is in the tilting position, and the predetermined time is set. After that, the closing control to return to the vertical position is performed.

Special when the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is started, or when the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B is started. Whether or not to make the variable display result of the symbol a "big hit" as a predetermined specific display result is determined before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and the effect control command for designating the variable display result and the variation pattern is the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 shown in FIG. 35. Is transmitted from to the effect control board 9012.

After the special figure game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern elapses, a definite special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived. Is displayed. "Left", "middle", and "right" decorations arranged in the display area of the image display device 905 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. In the symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, a variable display of a decorative symbol different from the special symbol is performed.

In the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B, the definite special that results in the variable display of the special symbol. When the symbol is derived and displayed, the image display device 905 derives and displays the definite decorative symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol. When a predetermined big hit symbol is derived and displayed as a variable display result of the special symbol, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" and is controlled to a big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state advantageous to the player. As a variable display result of the special symbol, when the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed and the lost symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result is "missing".

As an example, a special symbol indicating the numbers "3" and "7" is used as a jackpot symbol, and a special symbol indicating the symbol "-" is used as a lost symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as the jackpot symbol or the lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A may be a special symbol different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 904B. However, the special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol. Further, the special symbol of the lighting pattern having a specific meaning as a number or a symbol is not limited to the jackpot symbol or the lost symbol. For example, the special symbol of the arbitrary lighting pattern in the 7-segment LED can be the jackpot symbol or the lost symbol. May be.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening is opened and the special variable winning ball device 907 is in the first state which is advantageous for the player. Then, a round game is executed in which the large winning opening is continuously opened during a predetermined period or a period until a predetermined number of game balls enter the large winning opening and a winning ball is generated. During the period other than the execution period of such a round game, the large winning opening is closed, and the winning ball is difficult or impossible to generate. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, the winning ball is detected by the count switch 9023, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a prize ball for each detection. The round game in the jackpot game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit is reached.

When the special figure display result is "big hit", the case where the big hit type is either "non-probable change" or "probable change" is included. For example, as a variable display result of a special symbol, when the jackpot symbol indicating the number "3" is derived and displayed, the jackpot type is "non-probability", and when the jackpot symbol indicating the number "7" is derived and displayed, the jackpot is displayed. The type is "probability change". When the jackpot type is "non-probability change" or "probability variation", the upper limit time for setting the special variable winning ball device 907 as the first state advantageous to the player as a round game in the jackpot game state is relatively long. A normal open round of time is performed. As a round game in the big hit game state, a big hit type may be provided in which a short-term open round in which the upper limit time for setting the special variable winning ball device 907 to the first state is relatively short is executed. The jackpot game state in which the normal open round is executed is also referred to as the first specific game state. The jackpot game state in which the short-term open round is executed is also referred to as the second specific game state.

After the jackpot game state ends, the variable display result may be controlled to a probability variation state in which the probability of becoming a "big hit" is higher than that in the normal state, based on the establishment of a predetermined probability variation control condition. The probability change state is controlled so as to continue until a predetermined probability change end condition such as execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times or the start of the next big hit game state is satisfied. Further, after the jackpot game state is completed, the average variable display time may be controlled to a shorter time state than the normal state. The time saving state is controlled so as to continue until one of the time saving end condition of either the execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times or the start of the next big hit game state is satisfied first. .. As an example, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", the gaming state becomes the time saving state after the jackpot gaming state ends. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probability change", the game state becomes the probability change state after the jackpot game state ends.

In the probabilistic state and the time saving state, the normal variable winning ball device 906B is changed into the first state and the second state in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball easily passes through the second starting winning opening as compared with the normal state. For example, the normal symbol display 9020 controls the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, and the probability that the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "per ordinary symbol" in each normal symbol game. The tilt control time for controlling the tilt of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 906B based on the fact that the variable display result is "per normal figure" is set to be longer than in the normal state. The normal variable winning ball device 906B may be changed to the first state and the second state in an advantageous change mode by the control of lengthening the length and the control of increasing the number of tilts as compared with the normal state. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed. As described above, the control for changing the normally variable winning ball device 906B into the first state and the second state in the advantageous change mode is called high open control. By being controlled to such a probabilistic state or a time saving state, the time required for the next variable display result to become a "big hit" is shortened, and the special gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

The game balls used as a game medium in the pachinko game machine 901 and the recorded information of the scores given according to the number thereof may have valuable value that can be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes according to the quantity, for example. Just do it. Alternatively, the recorded information of these game balls and scores may have valuable value that can be used for another game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, although it cannot be exchanged for a special prize or a general prize.

In the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R provided in the image display device 905, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A , Of the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started corresponding to the start of any special figure game. Then, in the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end of the variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right". , The variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode.

Here, the reach mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 form a part of the jackpot combination, the decorative symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed continue to fluctuate. It is a display mode in which all or a part of the decorative symbols are changed in synchronization while forming all or a part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right", when the decorative symbols constituting the predetermined jackpot combination are still displayed. In the remaining decorative symbol display area that is not stopped, the decorative symbol is fluctuating, or all or part of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right". This is a display mode in which the decorative design is synchronized and fluctuates while forming all or a part of the jackpot combination.

In addition, in response to the reach mode, the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol is reduced, a character image different from the decorative symbol is displayed in the display area of the image display device 905, and the display mode of the background image is changed. By causing the display, reproducing and displaying a moving image different from the decorative pattern, or changing the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, an effect operation different from that before the reach mode may be executed. Such an effect operation such as display of a character image, change in display mode of a background image, reproduction display of a moving image, and change in variable display mode of a decorative pattern is called reach effect display. In the reach effect, not only the display operation on the image display device 905, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 908L and 908R, the lighting operation on the light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 909, and the like are the operation modes before the reach mode is reached. It may be included that the operation mode is different from that of the above.

As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns having different operation modes may be prepared in advance. Then, the possibility of becoming a "big hit" differs depending on the production mode in each reach production. That is, the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" can be different depending on which of the plurality of types of reach effects is executed. In this embodiment, as an example, reach effects such as normal, super A, and super B are preset. In normal, so-called normal reach (normal reach effect) is executed, and in super A and super B, super reach (super reach effect) is executed after normal reach is executed. The transition from normal reach to super reach at this time is also called development to super reach. Then, when a reach effect including a super reach such as super A or super B is executed, there is a high possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" as compared with the case where the normal reach effect is executed. Further, among the reach effects including the super reach, when a specific reach effect such as super B is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the reach effect of super A is executed.

The jackpot expectation is, for example, (probability that the effect is executed at the time of a jackpot) x (probability of being a jackpot) / {(probability that the effect is executed at the time of a jackpot) x (probability of being a jackpot) + (other than at the time of a jackpot) It is calculated by (probability that the effect is executed) x (probability that it does not become a big hit)}.

During the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect, for example, a predetermined effect image is displayed, an image display or voice output as a message, a game effect lamp 909, a decorative LED lighting operation, etc. , For example, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be the reach mode, the variable display result may be a "big hit", etc. due to the effect operation different from the variable display operation of the decorative symbol. A notice effect for notifying the player in advance of the advantage of the game executed by the pachinko gaming machine 901 may be executed.

The effect operation that becomes the advance notice effect is the variable display mode of the decorative symbol after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in all of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right". Is executed before the reach mode is reached. Further, the advance notice effect for notifying that the variable display result may be a "big hit" may include one executed after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach mode. In this way, the advance notice effect can be in the big hit game state at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to the derivation of the finalized special symbol or the confirmed decorative symbol which is the variable display result. Anything that can foretell sex will do. A plurality of notice patterns are prepared in advance according to the content of the effect operation when the notice effect is executed. The effect operation serving as the advance notice effect may be such that the variable display time of the special symbol does not change depending on whether or not it is executed.

In this embodiment, the character accessory effect driven by the first character accessory 9061 to the third character accessory 9063 is set to be feasible. The character accessory effect is an effect in which a part or all of the first character accessory 9061 to the third character accessory 9063 is driven. The character character effect may be executed in the super reach effect of Super B. In the reach effect of Super B, the super reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect is executed. The character character effect is performed after the normal reach is completed, immediately before the super reach effect is executed (hereinafter referred to as "super reach development"), and immediately before the definite decorative symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived (hereinafter referred to as "big hit result notification"). ) May be executed in one or both. When the character character effect is executed, the variable display result is more likely to be a "big hit" than when the character character effect is not executed at the same timing.

The character character role effects include the first character character character action effect as the character character character action effect to the third character character character movement effect, and the first character character character rotation effect as the character character character rotation effect to the third character character role. There is an object rotation effect. In the character accessory movement effect, the character accessory operates from the first position of the character accessory to the second position of the character accessory, or the character accessory operates from the second position of the character accessory to the first position of the character accessory. There is a production.

Specifically, as the first character accessory movement effect, the first character accessory 9061 operates from the first character accessory first position P9011 to the first character accessory second position P9012, and the first character accessory There is an effect that the 9061 operates from the first character accessory second position P9012 to the first character accessory first position P9011. As the second character accessory movement effect, the second character accessory 9062 operates from the second character accessory first position P9021 to the second character accessory second position P9022, and the second character accessory 9062 is the second. There is an effect of operating from the second character accessory second position P9022 to the second character accessory first position P9021. As the third character accessory movement effect, the third character accessory 9063 operates from the third character accessory first position P9031 to the third character accessory second position P9032, and the third character accessory 9063 is the third. There is an effect of operating from the second position P9032 of the character accessory to the first position P9031 of the third character accessory.

The character accessory rotation effect includes an effect in which the character accessory rotates (rotates) at the second position of the character accessory. Specifically, as the first character accessory rotation effect, there is an effect that the first character accessory 9061 rotates at the first character accessory second position P9012. As the second character accessory rotation effect, there is an effect that the second character accessory 9062 rotates at the second character accessory second position P9022. As a third character accessory rotation effect, there is an effect in which the third character accessory 9063 rotates at the third character accessory second position P9032.

In this embodiment, the first character accessory motion effect to the third character accessory motion effect may be executed when the super reach is developed. Further, at the time of the big hit result notification, the first character accessory motion effect to the third character accessory motion effect and the first character accessory rotation effect to the third character accessory rotation effect may be executed.

A button image or a controller image may be displayed before the character character effect is executed. In the display effect, the button image imitating the push button 9031B and the controller image imitating the stick controller 9031A are displayed on the image display device 905 together with the validity period bar. By displaying the button image and the controller image as the promotion display, the operation of the push button 9031B and the stick controller 9031A is promoted to the player.

The validity period bar indicates an operation validity period in which the operations of the push button 9031B and the stick controller 9041A are valid, and become shorter with the passage of time. When the push button 9031B and the stick controller 9031A are operated within the operation valid period, the effect control board 9012 accepts these operations. Further, the effect control board 9012 does not accept the operation of the push button 9031B or the stick controller 9031A except for the period of accepting the operation of the push button 9031B or the stick controller 9031A during the period other than the operation valid period. The character character effect and the button image display will be further described later.

In this embodiment, as a notice effect for notifying that the variable display result may be a "big hit", in addition to the above character character character effect effect, various notice effects such as step-up notice effect and pseudo-ream Notice production, group notice production, background notice production, fanning notice production, etc. are executed. The effect mode of the step-up notice effect is an effect mode in which a plurality of steps are prepared, and the prepared steps proceed to a predetermined stage. In the step-up notice effect, for example, as the step progresses, the variable display result is more likely to become a "big hit". The effect mode of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is an effect mode that makes it appear that the variable display is continuously performed a plurality of times in one variable display. The effect mode of the group notice effect is an effect mode in which specific characters or the like are displayed as a group across or popping out of the image display device 905. The specific characters displayed as a group in the group notice effect may be one type or a plurality of types. The effect mode of the background notice effect is an effect mode in which the background displayed on the image display device 905 changes. The production mode of the fanning notice effect is a production mode in which a decorative pattern or the like is fanned. In the advance notice effect, these effect modes may be combined and executed.

These advance notice effects are not limited to those by displaying an image on the screen of the image display device 905, and may include arbitrary effect operations using various effect devices. As an example of the advance notice effect different from the image display, the display color of the decorative LED may be changed, or the sound as a special sound effect may be output from the speakers 908L and 908R. In addition to or in place of some or all of these advance notice effects, some or all of the lighting and blinking of decorative LEDs, the display of effect images, and the output of sound effects are combined. It may be controlled to execute the advance notice effect. Further, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" when the period including the period in which the advance notice effect combining a plurality of types of effect modes is executed is included in the case where the advance notice effect is executed only with one type of effect mode. The possibility that a predetermined game value such as the possibility is given may be increased.

When the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, becomes a "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived and displayed in the display area of the image display device 905. As an example, when the jackpot type is "non-probable change" or "probable change", it is the same on the predetermined effective line in the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right". When the decorative symbols are aligned and stopped and displayed, the final decorative symbols that are a big hit combination may be derived and displayed.

When the special symbol display result is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not change to the reach mode, and the decorative symbols constituting the predetermined non-reach combination are stopped and displayed, so that the non-specific display result is obtained. The definite decorative design may be derived and displayed. In addition, when the special symbol display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach mode, the decorative symbols constituting the predetermined reach combination are stopped and displayed, so that the non-specific display is performed. The resulting definite decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment will be described.

On the main board 9011, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is started, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 90103 sets the interrupt disabled and then performs the necessary initial settings. In this initial setting, for example, RAM 90102 is cleared. In addition, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is set. As a result, after that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 at predetermined time intervals, and the CPU 90103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process. When the initial setting is completed, interrupts are permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko game machine 901 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed, and then the loop process may be started.

When the CPU 90103 that executes the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it sets the interrupt disabled state and executes a predetermined game control timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt processing for game control includes, for example, switch processing, error processing on the main side, information output processing, random number update processing for games, special symbol process processing, ordinary symbol process processing, command control processing, and the like. Processing for controlling the progress and the like is included.

The switch process is a process of determining the state of detection signals input from various switches such as a gate switch 9021, a first start port switch 9022A, a second start port switch 9022B, and a count switch 9023 via a switch circuit 90110. The error processing on the main side is a processing in which an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result. The information output process is a process of outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example. The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the side of the main board 9011 by software.

As an example, the game random numbers used on the main board 9011 side include a random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result, a random number value MR2'for determining the jackpot type, and a random number value MR3'for determining the fluctuation pattern. And the random number value MR4'for determining the display result of the general map. The random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game as a "big hit" to the big hit game state. The random value MR2'for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type when the variable display result is "big hit" to one of a plurality of types such as "non-probable variation" and "probable variation". Is. The random number value MR3'for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any of a plurality of prepared patterns. The random number value MR4'for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 9020 is "per normal figure" or "missing normal figure". It is a random value used.

In the special symbol process processing included in the game control timer interrupt processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 90102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the first special symbol display device 904A or Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation in the second special symbol display device 904B, set the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 907, and the like in a predetermined procedure. The normal symbol process process is a process that controls the display operation of the normal symbol display 9020 to enable variable display of the normal symbol and tilting operation setting of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 906B.

The command control process is a process of transmitting a control command from the main board 9011 to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 9012. As an example, in the command control process, among the output ports included in the I / O 90105, for the effect control board 9012, corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 90102. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command, set the predetermined control data in the output port of the effect control INT signal to turn the effect control INT signal on for a predetermined time and then turn it off. By doing so, it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, the interrupt enable state is set, and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 90103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S90101). In the start winning prize determination process, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 9022A and the second start port switch 9022B are on. At this time, if the first start opening switch 9022A is on, the special figure game using the first special figure is based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 906A. The first start winning process for updating the first special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the above, is performed. On the other hand, if the second start opening switch 9022B is on, a special figure game using the second special figure is based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second start winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 906B. The second start winning process for updating the second special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the above, is performed.

As an example, in the first start winning process, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved first special figures is a predetermined upper limit value. At this time, if the number of stored first special figures has reached the upper limit, the first start winning process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is less than the upper limit, the first reserved storage count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved storage counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102, is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is incremented by 1 when the game ball passes through the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Will be updated to. After that, a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning prize is extracted and stored as hold data in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102.

In the second start winning process, it is determined whether or not the second special figure reserved memory number is at a predetermined upper limit value. At this time, if the number of reserved second special figures has reached the upper limit, the second start winning process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is less than the upper limit, the second reserved storage count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved storage counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102, is added by 1. In this way, the second reserved memory count value is incremented by 1 when the game ball passes through the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Will be updated to. After that, a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning prize is extracted and stored as hold data in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S90101 shown in FIG. 36, the CPU 90103 selects one of the processes of steps S90110 to S90117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102. And execute.

The special symbol normal processing in step S90110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device are based on the presence or absence of hold data stored in the first special symbol hold storage unit and the second special symbol hold storage unit. It is determined whether or not to start the special figure game by 904B. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1'for determining the special symbol display result, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as a "big hit" is determined by the variable display result. Determined before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B is set corresponding to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game. .. In the special symbol normal processing, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance.

The variation pattern setting process in step S90111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the variable display result is a “big hit”. The variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is preset according to the variable pattern. Therefore, by determining the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process, the variable display time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the derivation of the finalized special symbol that is the variable display result is determined. Further, the variable pattern setting process may include a process of determining whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is set to "reach" when the variable display result is "missing". Alternatively, even if the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined to be "reach" by determining the variable pattern when the variable display result is "missing" in the variable pattern setting process at a predetermined ratio. Good. Further, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of setting the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B to start the variation of the special symbol. When the variation pattern setting process is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2".

The special symbol variation process in step S90112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are used to make settings for changing the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3".

The special symbol stop process in step S90113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop and display the confirmed special symbol that is the variable display result of the special symbol. The process of making settings is included. Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102 is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, the hit start specification command that specifies the start of the jackpot game state based on the special figure display result being "big hit" is set to be transmitted, and the value of the special figure process flag is set to ". Update to 4 ”. If the jackpot flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S90114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. In this big hit pre-opening process, based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit", etc., the process of starting the execution of the round game in the big hit game state and setting to open the big winning opening, etc. It is included. In this process, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the large winning opening is opened may be set to "29 seconds" so that the normal opening round is executed. If "probability" is set for the jackpot type, the short-term open round can be executed by setting the upper limit of the period for keeping the jackpot open to "0.1 seconds". Good. When the jackpot release preprocessing is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The process of opening the jackpot in step S90115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the switch from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6".

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S90116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round game in which the big winning opening is opened has reached a predetermined upper limit, and a process of determining whether or not the upper limit has been reached, and a next round game when the upper limit has not been reached. It includes processing that waits until is started. Then, when the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4", while when the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is "7". Is updated to.

The jackpot end processing of step S90117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end processing, a waiting period corresponding to a period in which the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed by an effect device such as an image display device 905, speakers 908L, 908R, and a game effect lamp 909. It includes a process of waiting until the time elapses, a process of making various settings for controlling the probabilistic state and the time saving state according to the success or failure of the probabilistic control condition, and the like. For example, depending on whether the jackpot type is "probability change" or "non-probability change", settings for controlling the probability change state or the time saving state are made. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S90110 of FIG. 36 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 37, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the second special figure hold storage number is “0” (step S90231). The second special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B. The CPU 90103 may read the second hold storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

When the number of second special figure hold storage is other than "0" in step S90231 (step S90231; NO), the hold data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102, for example, the head area of the second special figure hold storage unit. As a result, numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value is read out (step S90232). As a result, the game random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of the start prize at the second start prize opening in the start prize determination process of step S90101 shown in FIG. 36 are read out. The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step S90232, for example, by subtracting 1 from the second reserved memory count value and updating, the second special figure reserved memory is updated so as to be subtracted by 1, and the second special figure reserved memory is updated. The stored contents in the unit are shifted (step S90233). For example, the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number "1" in the second special figure hold storage unit is shifted upward one entry at a time. Further, in the process of step S90233, the total number of reserved storages may be updated to be subtracted by 1. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102, is updated to "2" (step S90234).

When the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in step S90231 (step S90231; YES), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step S90235). The first special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A. The CPU 90103 may read the first reserved storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is "0". As described above, the process of step S90235 is executed when the second special figure reserved storage number is determined to be "0" in step S90231, and the first special figure reserved storage number is "0". Judge whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

The special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to the one executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure. That is, regardless of whether it is the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the special figure game may be executed in the order in which the game balls pass through the starting winning opening. In this case, the start opening data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed is associated with the hold number together with the hold data or separately from the hold data. It may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 so that the order in which the start conditions are satisfied can be specified for the special figure game corresponding to each reserved data.

When the number of the first special figure reserved storage is other than "0" in step S90235 (step S90235; NO), the reserved data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102, for example, the head area of the first special figure reserved storage unit. As a result, numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value is read out (step S90236). As a result, the game random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of the start prize at the first start prize opening in the start prize determination process of step S90101 shown in FIG. 36 are read out. The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step S90236, for example, by subtracting 1 from the first reserved memory count value and updating, the first special figure reserved memory is updated so as to be subtracted by 1, and the first special figure reserved memory is updated. The stored contents in the unit are shifted (step S90237). For example, the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number "1" in the first special figure hold storage unit is shifted upward one entry at a time. Further, in the process of step S90237, the total number of reserved storages may be updated to be subtracted by 1. Then, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S90238).

After executing any of the processes of steps S90234 and S90238, the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is determined to be either "big hit" or "loss" (step S90239). As an example, in the process of step S90239, a special figure display result determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of ROM 90101 in advance is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the special figure display result. In the special figure display result determination table, a numerical value to be compared with the random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the determination result of whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "loss". I just need to be there. The CPU 90103 may determine the special figure display result by referring to the special figure display result determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result read from the random number buffer for variation. ..

FIG. 38A shows an example of determining the special figure display result by the process of step S90239. In this way, whether the special figure display result should be "big hit" or "miss" is determined by using the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result or the special figure display result determination table. It may be determined by the ratio. In the determination example shown in FIG. 38 (A), the determination ratio of whether or not the special figure display result is "big hit" is different depending on the presence or absence of the probability variation control in the probability variation state. The CPU 90103 may determine that the probability change control is being performed when the probability change flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102 is on.

As shown in FIG. 38 (A), when the probability change control is performed in the probability change state, the special figure display result is "" at a higher rate than when the probability change control is not performed in the normal state or the time saving state. "Big hit" is decided. Therefore, for example, the probability change control is performed based on the fact that the probability change flag is set to the ON state corresponding to the case where the jackpot type is "probability change" by the jackpot end processing of step S90117 shown in FIG. In the state, the special figure display result is more likely to be a "big hit" and the big hit game state is more likely to occur than when the probability change control is not performed in the normal state or the time saving state.

In this embodiment, whether it is a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A or a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B. Regardless of this, the special figure display result is determined at a predetermined ratio depending on the presence or absence of probability variation control. On the other hand, the determination value is assigned to the special symbol display result corresponding to each of the case of the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A and the case of the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 904B. Different decision tables may be prepared. In this case, the assignment of the determined value to the predetermined special symbol display result is different between the case of the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A and the case of the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 904B. You may.

After that, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the special figure display result determined by the process of step S90239 is a "big hit" (step S90240). When the special figure display result is determined to be "big hit" (step S90240; YES), the big hit flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102 is set to the on state (step S90241). Further, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S90242). As an example, in the process of step S90242, a jackpot type determination table prepared in advance by storing in a predetermined area of ROM 90101 is selected and set as a table used for determining the jackpot type. In the jackpot type determination table, a numerical value to be compared with the random number value MR2'for determining the jackpot type may be assigned to the determination result of which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be used. The CPU 90103 may determine the jackpot type by referring to the jackpot type determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2'for determining the jackpot type read from the variable random number buffer.

FIG. 38B shows an example of determining the jackpot type by the process of step S90242. In this determination example, the jackpot type is determined to be either "non-probable change" or "probable change" at a predetermined ratio regardless of whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The jackpot type that can be determined may be different, or the determination ratio of the jackpot type may be different, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. As an example, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the jackpot type can be determined to be "probable" at a predetermined ratio, while when the variable special map is the second special figure, the jackpot type is "probable". May be set so that it is not determined.

After executing the process of step S90242, the jackpot type is stored (step S90243). The CPU 90103 may store the jackpot type by storing data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102.

If the special symbol display result is not a "big hit" in step S90240 (step S90240; NO), or after executing the process of step S90243, a definite special symbol that is a variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game is determined. (Step S90244). As an example, when it is determined in step S90240 that the special symbol display result is not a "big hit", a special symbol indicating a predetermined "-" symbol as a lost symbol is determined as a definite special symbol. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S90240 that the special symbol display result is "big hit", any of the special symbols predetermined as a plurality of types of jackpot symbols is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type in step S90242. It may be decided as a definite special symbol. More specifically, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", the special symbol indicating the number "3" may be determined as the definite special symbol. When the jackpot type is "probability change", the special symbol indicating the number "7" may be determined as the finalized special symbol.

After executing the process of step S90244, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1" (step S90245), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1" in the process of step S90245, the fluctuation pattern setting process of step S90111 shown in FIG. 36 is executed when the next timer interrupt occurs.

If the number of reserved memory of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step S90235 (step S90235; YES), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (step S90246), the special symbol Ends normal processing. In this demo display setting, whether or not an effect control command for designating a demonstration display by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 905 has been transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. To judge. At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

FIG. 39 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S90111 of FIG. 36 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 39 (A), the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step S90261). Then, when the big hit flag is on (step S90261; YES), the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the big hit when the special figure display result is “big hit” is determined (step S90262). On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off (step S90261; NO), the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the loss when the special figure display result becomes "loss" is determined (step S90263).

FIG. 39 (B) shows the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" which is not the reach mode and "reach" which is the reach mode. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to each of them and when the variable display result is a "big hit".

In the process of step S90262 shown in FIG. 39 (A), the fluctuation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined by using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table prepared in advance, for example, by storing in a predetermined area of ROM 90101. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value to be compared with the random number value MR3'for determining the fluctuation pattern is used as the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, depending on whether the jackpot type is "non-probability variation" or "probability variation". It suffices if it is assigned. The CPU 90103 responds to the case where the variable display result becomes "big hit" by referring to the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3'for determining the fluctuation pattern read from the random number buffer for fluctuation. The fluctuation pattern is determined.

In the process of step S90263 shown in FIG. 39 (A), there is a case where the game state is the normal state and a case where the game state is the probability change state or the time reduction state and the time reduction control is performed. The fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined by using one of a plurality of loss fluctuation pattern determination tables prepared in advance. In a plurality of lost fluctuation pattern determination tables, the numerical value to be compared with the random number value MR3'for determining the fluctuation pattern is the determination result of the fluctuation pattern according to whether it is normal time or time saving and the total number of reserved storages. It suffices if it is assigned to. The CPU 90103 refers to one of the loss fluctuation pattern determination tables according to the normal time and the time saving, based on the numerical data indicating the fluctuation pattern determination random number value MR3'read from the variation random number buffer. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result becomes "missing" may be determined.

In the loss fluctuation pattern determination table, when the total number of reserved storages is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is determined to be "non-reach" at a higher rate than when the total number of reserved memories is less than a predetermined number. It suffices if a decision value is assigned. As described above, when the number of reserved special figures is not less than the predetermined number, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be set so as to be more difficult to determine as the reach mode than when the number is less than the predetermined number. As a result, when the number of special figure reservations is relatively large, the average variable display time is shortened as compared with when the number of special figure reservations is relatively small, and the occurrence of invalid start winnings is suppressed, and the game ball by the player. It is possible to reduce the firing stop of.

FIG. 40 (A) shows an example of determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit. In this determination example, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern in which the normal reach effect is executed such as the variation pattern PA3'-1 is the reach effect in which the super reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect such as the variation patterns PA3'-2 and PA3'-3. It is set to be lower than the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of.

FIG. 40B shows an example of determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss. In this determination example, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern in which the normal reach effect is executed such as the fluctuation pattern PA2'-1 is the reach effect in which the super reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect such as the fluctuation patterns PA2'-2 and PA2'-3. It is set to be higher than the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of.

In addition, at the time of a big hit, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect is executed is set to be higher than at the time of loss. As a result, when the variable display result is derived after the super reach effect is executed, the possibility that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" is increased.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 40 (A), the determination ratio of the variation pattern in which the reach effect of the super B such as the variation pattern PA3'-3 is executed is executed, and the reach effect of the super A such as the variation pattern PA3'-2 is executed. It is set to be higher than the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern to be performed. On the other hand, in the determination example shown in FIG. 40 (B), the determination ratio of the variation pattern in which the reach effect of the super B such as the variation pattern PA2'-3 is executed is the reach effect of the super A such as the variation pattern PA2'-2. Is set to be lower than the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern to be executed. Further, at the time of a big hit, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of Super B is executed is set to be sufficiently higher than that at the time of loss. Therefore, when the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the game state becomes the big hit game state, the variable display result is displayed after the reach effect of Super B is executed at a higher rate than the case where the big hit game state does not occur. Derived.

As shown in FIG. 39 (B), the fluctuation pattern PA2'-1 to PA2'-3 and the fluctuation pattern PA3'-1 to PA3'-3 have the same special figure fluctuation time and contents. , The variable display result is different whether it is "missing" or "big hit". By setting the determination ratios shown in FIGS. 40 (A) and 40 (B), when the super reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect, the normal reach effect is executed, and the jackpot is higher than when the super reach effect is not executed after the normal reach effect. Expectations are raised. Further, when the reach effect of Super B is executed, the expectation of big hit is higher than that when the reach effect of Super A is executed.

After executing any of the processes of steps S90262 and S90263, the special symbol variation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is set (step S90264). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the definite special symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. As shown in FIG. 39 (B), the special figure fluctuation time is predetermined in accordance with a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. The CPU 90103 can set the timing at which the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is derived by setting the special symbol fluctuation time.

Following the process of step S90264, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A and the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B are started. A setting for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol is made so as to start any of the special symbol games for which the conditions are satisfied (step S90265). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B is made.

After executing the process of step S90265, the command transmission setting at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol is performed (step S90266). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 90103 receives the first variation start command, the variation pattern specification command, the variable display result notification command, and the first variation from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. In order to sequentially transmit the hold storage number notification command, the storage address in ROM 90101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is specified. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 90103 receives the second variation start command, the variation pattern specification command, the variable display result notification command, and the second variation from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. In order to sequentially transmit the hold storage number notification commands, the storage address in ROM 90101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is specified.

The first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command use the fluctuation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B. This is an effect control command that specifies the start of fluctuation in the special figure game. The variable pattern specification command is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R on the image display device 905 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is an effect control command that specifies a variation pattern such as a decorative pattern. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol.

After executing the process of step S90266, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2" (step S90267), and then the variation pattern setting process ends. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "2" in step S90267, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the special symbol variation process of step S90112 shown in FIG. 36 is executed.

Next, the operation on the effect control board 9012 will be described.

In the effect control board 9012, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 90120 is activated to execute a predetermined effect control main process. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes a predetermined initialization process to clear the RAM 90122, set various initial values, and set the CTC registers mounted on the effect control board 9012. .. After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on. The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time elapses, for example, based on the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, it waits.

Further, on the effect control board 9012 side, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 9011 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 9011 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but interrupts when using a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order. The effect control CPU 90120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 90125, a control signal that becomes an effect control command is transmitted from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015. To capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 90122. After that, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

When the timer interrupt flag is on, the timer interrupt flag is cleared to turn it off, and command analysis processing is executed. In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed.

After executing the command analysis process, the effect control process process is executed. In the effect control process process, various operations such as display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 905, sound output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, lighting operation in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 909 and the decorative LED, and the like The control content of the effect operation using the effect device is determined, determined, set, etc. according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 9011. Following the effect control process process, the effect random number update process is executed, and the software updates the numerical data indicating the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the RAM 90122 as various random number values used for the effect control.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process processing. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 41, the effect control CPU 90120 selects one of the following processes S90170 to S90176 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90122. Execute.

The variable display start waiting process in step S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. This variable display start waiting process displays a variable display of a decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 905 based on whether or not a first fluctuation start command or a second fluctuation start command transmitted from the main board 9011 is received. It includes a process for determining whether or not to start. The first variation start command is an effect control command for notifying that the special figure game using the first special figure is started by the first special symbol display device 904A. The second variation start command is an effect control command for notifying that the special figure game using the second special figure is started by the second special symbol display device 904B. When either the first variation start command or the second variation start command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1".

The variable display start setting process in step S90171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process is performed on the screen of the image display device 905 in response to the start of variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. In order to perform variable display of the decorative symbol in, and other various production operations, it includes a process of determining a fixed decorative symbol and various production control patterns according to a variation pattern of a special symbol, a type of display result, and the like. .. When the variable display start setting process is executed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2".

The variable display effect process in step S90172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, various control data are read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90122, and various effects during the variable display of the decorative symbol are performed. Processing for performing control is included. In addition, in the variable display effect processing, the final stop symbol as the final stop symbol, which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol, is completely stopped and displayed in response to the reception of the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 9011. The process to make it is included. It should be noted that the final decoration symbol may be completely stopped and displayed in response to the fact that the end code is read from the predetermined effect control pattern. In this case, when the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command elapses, the effect control board 9012 autonomously operates without using the effect control command from the main board 9011. The variable display result can be confirmed by deriving and displaying the fixed decorative symbol. After performing such effect control and the like, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3".

The variable display stop process in step S90173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the variable display stop processing, the jackpot game state starts based on the variable display result notified by the variable display result notification command, the judgment result of whether or not the jackpot start designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 is received, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not to be performed. Then, when the variable display result corresponds to "big hit" and the big hit game state is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", while the special figure display result corresponds to "miss". If the jackpot game state is not started, the effect process flag is cleared and the value is initialized to "0".

The jackpot display process in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. This jackpot display process includes a process for executing a jackpot notification effect for notifying the start of the jackpot gaming state based on the reception of the jackpot start designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 and the like. Then, when the execution of the jackpot notification effect is completed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5".

The jackpot effect process in step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and displays the effect image based on the set content on the screen of the image display device 905. Or, the sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 908L and 908R by the output of the command to the voice control board 9013, and the game effect lamp 909 and the decorative LED are turned on / off / blink by the output of the command to the lamp control board 9014. Such as, various effect control in the big hit game state is executed. Further, in the jackpot middle effect processing, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "6" in response to, for example, receiving the jackpot end designation command transmitted from the main board 9011.

The jackpot end effect process in step S90176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this jackpot end effect process, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and displays an effect image based on the set contents on the screen of the image display device 905. Or, the sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 908L and 908R by the output of the command to the voice control board 9013, and the game effect lamp 909 and the decorative LED are turned on / off / blink by the output of the command to the lamp control board 9014. Such as, various effect control at the end of the big hit game state is executed. After that, the effect process flag is cleared and the value is initialized to "0".

FIG. 42A is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S90171 of FIG. 41. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 42 (A), the effect control CPU 90120 first determines the final stop symbol or the like to be the final decorative symbol as the variable display result of the decorative symbol (step S90401). At this time, the effect control CPU 90120 is based on the variation start determination content such as the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. , Determine the final stop symbol. In this embodiment, "non-reach (loss)", "reach (loss)", "non-probability (big hit)", and "probability (probability)" are determined at the start of fluctuation according to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the variable display result. Big hit) ”.

FIG. 42B shows an example of determining a decorative symbol to be the final stop symbol in the process of step S90401. In this example, when the content of determination at the start of fluctuation is "non-reach (loss)", different decorative symbols are determined as the final stop symbols in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R. The effect control CPU 90120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a left-determined symbol, which is updated by an effect random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 90124 or the RAM 90122, and stores it in the ROM 90121 in advance. By referring to the prepared left confirmed symbol determination table or the like, the left confirmed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 905L in the display area of the image display device 905 is determined among the confirmed decorative symbols. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the right-determined symbol, which is updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the random counter for effect, is extracted, and the right-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in ROM 90121 is referred to. Etc., among the fixed decorative symbols, the right fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 905R in the display area of the image display device 905 is determined. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right confirmed decorative symbol is determined to be different from the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol by the setting in the right confirmed symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-determined decorative symbol updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 is referred to. As a result, among the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 905C in the display area of the image display device 905 is determined.

If the content to be determined at the start of fluctuation is "reach (loss)", the same decorative symbol is determined as the final stop symbol in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R. The effect control CPU 90120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left / right confirmed symbol updated by the random number circuit 90124, the random counter for effect, or the like, and prepares the left / right confirmed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121. By referring to or the like, among the fixed decorative symbols, the decorative symbols having the same stop-displayed symbol numbers in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R in the display area of the image display device 905 are displayed. decide. Further, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the medium-determined symbol determination table previously stored and prepared in the ROM 90121 is referred to. Therefore, among the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 905C in the display area of the image display device 905 is determined. Here, for example, when the symbol number of the medium-fixed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol, and the fixed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, an arbitrary value is used. May be added or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-fixed decorative symbol so that the fixed decorative symbol becomes a reach combination instead of a jackpot combination. Alternatively, when determining the middle-fixed decorative symbol, the difference between the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the difference may be set.

If the decision at the start of fluctuation is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability change (big hit)", it is the same in the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right". The decorative design of is decided as the final stop design. The effect control CPU 90120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a jackpot confirmed symbol updated by the random number circuit 90124, the effect random counter, or the like. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot confirmation symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L in the display area of the image display device 905, A decorative symbol having the same stop-displayed symbol number is determined for 905C and 905R. At this time, depending on whether the jackpot type is "non-probable change" or "probable change", whether or not the promotion effect during the big hit is executed, which of the normal symbol and the probabilistic symbol is used as the definite decorative symbol. Should be decided. Specifically, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variation", a fixed decorative symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of normal symbols. In addition, when it is determined that the jackpot type is "probability change" and the promotion effect during the jackpot is not executed, a fixed decoration symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of probability variation symbols. On the other hand, even if the jackpot type is "probability change", when it is decided to execute the jackpot middle promotion effect, the fixed decorative symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of normal symbols. As a result, even though the probabilistic symbols are aligned and displayed as the final decorative symbols, it is possible to prevent the promotion effect during the jackpot from being executed so as not to give the player a sense of distrust.

In the process of step S90401, when the decision content at the start of fluctuation is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", whether or not to execute a probabilistic promotion effect such as a re-lottery effect or a big hit medium promotion effect It may be decided. In the re-lottery effect, once the decorative symbol of the non-probable variable jackpot combination consisting of the same normal symbol is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, it is once difficult or unrecognizable to be controlled to the probabilistic state. It is possible to notify that the decorative symbol is controlled to the probabilistic state by displaying the decorative symbol in a variable manner again and stopping and displaying the decorative symbol of the probabilistic jackpot combination consisting of the same probabilistic symbol. In addition, after the decorative symbol is re-variated by the re-lottery effect, the decorative symbol of the non-probability change jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed, so that it may not be notified that the decorative symbol is controlled to the probabilistic state. In addition, it suffices to be able to notify that the player is controlled to the probability change state by executing the jackpot promotion effect during the jackpot game state or at the end of the jackpot game state. When it is determined in the process of step S90401 that the re-lottery effect is to be executed, the combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed may be determined before the re-lottery effect is executed.

Following the determination of the final stop symbol or the like in step S90401, the effect control CPU 90120 performs the character accessory effect effect determination process (step S90402). FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S90402 of FIG. 42 (A) as the character accessory effect determination process. In the character accessory effect determination process shown in FIG. 43, the effect control CPU 90120 first performs the character accessory effect determination process at the time of development of super reach (step S90501). In the super reach development character character character effect determination process, as an example, the effect control CPU 90120 is stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 90121 as a table used for determining the character character character effect during super reach development. The prepared character character character character role production determination table at the time of super reach development shown in FIG. 44 (A) is selected and set. In the character character character effect production determination table at the time of super reach development, for example, whether or not the character character character effect is executed during the super reach development, or when the character character character effect is executed, the character that operates is the first character role. It is determined which of the objects 9061 to the third character accessory 9063. Regarding the presence / absence of execution of the character character effect and the selection of the character at the time of execution, the variation pattern PA3'-in which the super reach effect is executed when the variation pattern is Super B and the variable display result is "big hit". Depending on whether it is 3 or the variation pattern PA2'-3 in which the super reach effect is executed and the variable display result is "missing", the numerical value to be compared with the random value for determining the character character effect effect is It may be assigned to any of the determination results of "no execution", "third character", "second character", and "first character". In addition, "no execution" indicates a pattern in which the character character character effect is not executed, and "third character" is the third character character character action effect in which the third character character character 9063 operates as the character character effect. The "second character" indicates a pattern in which the second character accessory movement effect in which the second character accessory 9062 operates as the character accessory effect is executed, and the "first character" indicates a character combination. The pattern in which the first character accessory movement effect in which the first character accessory 9061 operates as the object effect is executed is shown.

The effect control CPU 90120 serves as a character character at the time of super reach development based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a character character effect effect extracted from, for example, a random number circuit 90124 or a random number counter for effect provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122. By referring to the object production determination table, when "no execution" is performed during the development of super reach, or when the character character effect is executed, the "third character", "second character", and "first character" are used. You just have to decide if there is.

FIG. 44 (A) shows a configuration example of a character accessory production determination table at the time of super reach development. In this super reach development character character role production determination table, when the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern PA3'-3 in which the super reach effect is executed when the super reach is super B and the variable display result is a "big hit". , "No execution", "3rd character", "2nd character", "1st character", "No execution" is selected less frequently than "3rd character", and "3rd character" Is selected less frequently than the "second character", and the "second character" is selected less frequently than the "first character" (selection ratio: "no execution" <"first" 3 characters "<" 2nd character "<" 1st character ").

Further, when the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern PA2'-3 in which the super reach effect is executed when the fluctuation pattern is Super B and the variable display result is "missing", the "first character" is the "first character". The percentage of selection is lower than that of "2 characters", the percentage of selection of "2nd character" is lower than that of "3rd character", and the percentage of selection of "3rd character" is lower than that of "no execution". The ratio is low (selection ratio: "first character" <"second character" <"third character" <"no execution"). Therefore, the jackpot expectation is higher for the "third character" than for "no execution", higher for the "second character" than for the "third character", and for the "second character" than for the "second character". "1 character" is higher (big hit expectation: "no execution" <"third character" <"second character" <"first character").

After executing the process of step S90501, the effect control CPU 90120 performs the button image display determination process at the time of super reach development (step S90502). In the super reach development button image display determination process, as an example, the effect control CPU 90120 is prepared by storing it in a predetermined area of the ROM 90121 in advance as a table used for determining the button image display at the time of super reach development. The button image display determination table at the time of super reach development shown in FIG. 44 (B) is selected and set. In the button image display determination table during super reach development, for example, whether or not the button image is displayed during super reach development, or whether or not the character image is displayed together with the button image when the button image is displayed. decide. The selection of the button image display and the character image display is the fluctuation pattern PA3'-3 in which the super reach effect is executed when the fluctuation pattern is Super B and the variable display result is a "big hit", or the super The numerical value to be compared with the random value for determining the button image display at the time of super reach development is "No execution" depending on whether the variation pattern PA2'-3 in which the reach effect is executed and the variable display result is "missing". It may be assigned to any of the determination results of "without character" and "with character". Note that "no execution" indicates a pattern in which the button image is not displayed, "no character" indicates a pattern in which the button image is displayed but the character image is not displayed, and "with character" indicates the button image and the character image. Indicates the pattern in which is displayed.

The effect control CPU 90120 develops super reach based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a button image display at the time of super reach development extracted from, for example, a random number circuit 90124 or a random counter for effect provided in a predetermined area of RAM 90122. By referring to the time button image display determination table, it is determined whether it is "no execution" at the time of super reach development, or "without character" or "with character" when the button image is displayed. do it.

FIG. 44B shows a configuration example of the button image display determination table at the time of super reach development. In this super reach development button image display determination table, when the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern PA3'-3 in which the super reach effect when the super reach is Super B is executed and the variable display result is a "big hit", "execution" Of "None", "No character", and "With character", "No execution" is selected less than "No character", and "No character" is selected more than "With character". Is low (selection ratio: "no execution" <"no character" <"with character").

Further, when the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern PA2'-3 in which the super reach effect is executed when the fluctuation pattern is Super B and the variable display result is "missing", "with character" is better than "without character". Is also selected at a lower rate, and "without character" is selected at a lower rate than "without execution" (selection rate: "with character" <"without character" <"without execution"). For this reason, the jackpot expectation is higher for "no character" than for "no execution" and higher for "with character" than for "no character" (big hit expectation: "no execution" < "No character" <"With character").

When the effect control CPU 90120 determines “with character” as the button image display, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the image of the character determined by the type of character accessory effect on the image display device 905 in step S90501. For example, in step S90501, when the "third character" is determined as the type of character character effect effect, as shown in FIG. 47 (C-2), the third character image 90213 is displayed together with the button image 90201. Display on 905.

Note that the button image depends on whether or not the character character effect is executed in step S90501 (when any of the "third character" to the "first character" is determined as the character character effect). The display determination ratio may be different. For example, when the character character effect is executed (when any of the "third character" to the "first character" is determined as the character character effect), the character character effect is not executed (character). The ratio of the button image being displayed (either "without character" or "with character" is determined as the button image display) is higher than when "no execution" is determined as the character effect). May be good.

Further, when "with character" is determined as the button image display, the execution of the character character effect may be confirmed. In other words, when "no execution" is determined as the character character effect effect, "with character" may not be determined as the button image display (the determination ratio is 0).

After executing the process of step S90502, the effect control CPU 90120 performs the image display determination process at the time of the jackpot result notification (step S90503). In the image display determination process at the time of jackpot result notification, as an example, the effect control CPU 90120 is prepared by storing in advance in a predetermined area of ROM 90121 as a table to be used for determining the image to be displayed at the time of jackpot result notification. The image display determination table at the time of notification of the jackpot result shown in FIG. 44 (C) is selected and set. In the big hit result notification image display determination table, for example, it is determined whether or not the button image or the controller image is displayed at the time of the big hit result notification, or neither of them is displayed. The selection of the button image display and the character image display is the fluctuation pattern PA3'-3 in which the super reach effect is executed when the fluctuation pattern is Super B and the variable display result is a "big hit", or the super Depending on whether the variation pattern PA2'-3 in which the reach effect is executed and the variable display result is "missing", the numerical values to be compared with the random value for determining the image display at the time of jackpot result notification are "none" and " It may be assigned to any of the determination results of "button image" and "controller image". Note that "none" indicates a pattern in which neither the button image nor the controller image is displayed, "button image" indicates a pattern in which the button image is displayed, and "controller image" indicates a pattern in which the controller image is displayed. Is shown.

The effect control CPU 90120 is used to notify the jackpot result based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the image display at the time of jackpot result notification extracted from, for example, a random number circuit 90124 or a random counter for effect provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122. By referring to the image display determination table, it may be determined whether the jackpot result is "none", "button image", or "controller image" at the time of notification.

FIG. 44C shows a configuration example of the image display determination table at the time of jackpot result notification. In this image display determination table at the time of jackpot result notification, when the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern PA3'-3 in which the super reach effect when the super B is executed and the variable display result is "big hit", "none" Of the "button image" and "controller image", "none" is selected less frequently than "button image", and "button image" is selected less frequently than "controller image". (Selection ratio: "None" <"Button image" <"Controller image").

Further, when the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern PA2'-3 in which the super reach effect is executed when the fluctuation pattern is Super B and the variable display result is "missing", the "controller" is more than the "button image". The selection rate is low, and the selection rate of "button image" is lower than that of "none" (selection rate: "controller image" <"button image" <"none"). Therefore, the jackpot expectation is higher for the "button image" than for "none" and higher for the "controller image" than for the "button image" (big hit expectation: "none" <"button". Image "<" Controller image ").

When displaying the button image or the controller image, the button image or the controller image is clearly displayed, but the display may be performed so as to encourage whether or not the button image or the controller image is displayed. For example, when the button image or controller image is displayed lightly to incite the display of the button image or controller image, and then the button image or controller image is clearly displayed, or when the button image or controller image disappears without being displayed. There may be. Alternatively, the button image and the controller image may be alternately displayed in a faint manner to encourage whether the button image or the controller image is displayed or neither is displayed. In this case, for example, even if the button image display is "none", the button image and the controller image may be displayed lightly in common.

In this way, when the character accessory effect determination process is completed, the process returns to the flow shown in FIG. 42A, the process of step S90402 is executed, and then the effect control CPU 90120 executes the advance notice effect determination process (step S90404). In the advance notice effect determination process, it is determined whether or not to execute a advance notice effect other than the character character character effect effect determination process, for example, a step-up advance notice effect, a pseudo continuous advance notice effect, a group advance notice effect, a background advance notice effect, a fanning advance notice effect, and the like.

After executing the process of step S90404, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the effect control pattern to one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step S90406). For example, the effect control CPU 90120 can be any of a plurality of prepared special figure variation effect control patterns corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command and various effects determined in the processes of steps S90402 to S90405. Select or set as the usage pattern.

After executing the process of step S90406, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90122 is set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command (step S90407). Then, the setting for starting the variation of the decorative pattern or the like in the image display device 905 is made (step S90408). At this time, for example, the image display device 905 is transmitted by transmitting a display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined as the pattern to be used in step S90406 to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 90123. The variation of the decorative symbol may be started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R provided on the display screen of.

Following the process of step S90408, a setting for updating the hold storage display in the start winning prize storage display area 905H is made in response to the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol (step S90409). For example, in the start winning prize storage display area 905H, the display portion corresponding to the hold number "1" may be erased, and the entire display portion may be moved to the left one by one. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S90410), and then the variable display start setting process ends.

Next, the production mode of the character character production will be described. The character character effect may be executed when the super reach is developed and when the jackpot result is notified. Therefore, first, the character character production during the development of Super Reach will be described.

FIG. 45 is a diagram for explaining the flow of character character character production during the development of super reach. In the special figure game, as shown in FIG. 45 (A), the decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R in the image display device 905 perform variable display. At this time, the first character accessory 9061, the second character accessory 9062, and the third character accessory 9063 are the first character accessory first position P9011 and the second character accessory first position P9021, respectively, as shown in FIG. 34. , And the third character accessory first position P9031 is stationary.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 45 (B), the symbol common to the left decorative symbol display area 905L and the right decorative symbol display area 905R, here, the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed, so that the decorative symbol is variably displayed. When the state becomes the reach state, the decorative character "reach!" Is displayed on the image display device 905, and then the normal reach effect is executed. Subsequently, for example, when "no character" is determined in the super reach development button image display determination process (step S90502) shown in FIG. 43, the super reach development character accessory effect determination process (step) shown in FIG. Regardless of the content of the determination in S90501), the button image 90201 and the validity period bar 90202 are displayed in the center of the image display device 905 as shown in FIG. 45 (C-1).

Further, when "with character" is determined in the button image display determination process (step S90502) at the time of super reach development, for example, as a character character effect effect in the super reach development character character effect effect determination process (step S90501) When the "first character" has been determined, as shown in FIG. 45 (C-2), the button image 90201 and the validity period bar 90202 are displayed in the center of the image display device 905, and the first character is determined. Image 90211 is displayed. At this time, the validity period bar 90202 is displayed in green.

By displaying the button image 90201 in this way, the operation of the push button 9031B is promoted to the player. Further, by displaying the valid period bar 90202, the player is notified of the operation valid period in which the effect control board 9012 accepts the operation of the push button 9031B shown in FIG. 35. Further, by displaying the button image 90201 and the first character image 90211, it is suggested that the first character accessory operation effect in which the first character accessory 9061 operates is executed, and the jackpot expectation is high. It makes players aware that they are there and raises expectations for big hits. If "no execution" is determined in the super reach development button image display determination process (step S90502), the content of the determination in the super reach development character character effect effect determination process (step S90501) is irrelevant. However, the button image 90201 and the validity period bar 90202 are not displayed.

As shown in FIG. 45 (C-2), when the button image 90201 and the first character image 90211 are displayed, the mode in which the first character image 90211 brings the button image 90201 is displayed. However, other aspects may be displayed. For example, the button image 90201 may be displayed and the first character image 90211 may be simply displayed, or the button image 90201 may be displayed and the first character image 90211 may be displayed after a short period of validity. You may. Further, a plurality of these display modes may be provided and displayed in various modes (patterns).

After the effect shown in FIG. 45 (C-1) or (C-2), when the effect control board 9012 accepts the operation of the push button 9031B within the operation valid period, or when the operation valid period elapses, the super reach develops. When "no execution" is determined in the time character character effect effect determination process (step S90501), the button image 90201, the validity period bar 90202, and further FIG. 45 are shown in FIG. 46 (D-1). After (C-2), the image in which the first character image 90211 disappears is erased from the image display device 905, and the erased image 90221 is displayed. In addition, the first character accessory 9061, the second character accessory 9062, and the third character accessory 9063 remain stopped.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 46 (E-1), the decorative characters "Super Reach!" Are displayed in the center of the image display device 905. In this way, the player is made to recognize that the reach mode has evolved from the normal reach effect to the super reach effect. After that, as shown in FIG. 46 (F), the image display device 905 executes a super reach effect.

Further, after the effect shown in FIG. 45 (C-1) or (C-2), when the effect control board 9012 accepts the operation of the push button 9031B within the operation valid period, or when the operation valid period elapses, the supermarket is used. When the "first character" is determined in the character character character effect effect determination process (step S90501) at the time of reach development, the first character character character character 9061 is the first character as shown in FIG. 46 (D-2). The first character accessory movement effect that moves from the accessory first position P9011 to the first character accessory second position P9012 is executed. Further, in the image display device 905, if the button image 90201 and the validity period bar 90202 are erased, and further, if FIG. 45 (C-2) is displayed before the display of FIG. 46 (D-2). , The first character image 90211 is erased, and the effect image 90222 that makes the first character accessory 9061 stand out is displayed behind the first character accessory second position P9012. The effect image 90222 corresponds to the first character accessory 9061 and is displayed behind the first character accessory 9061 to make the first character accessory 9061 stand out.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 46 (E-2), the operation of moving the first character accessory 9061 from the first character accessory second position P9012 to the first character accessory first position P9011 is performed. In addition, the decorative characters "Super Reach!" Are displayed in the center of the image display device 905. The decorative character of "Super Reach!" May be started to be displayed after the first character accessory 9061 moves (saves) to the first character accessory first position P9011, or the first character accessory 9061 may be displayed. May start displaying while is moving to the first character accessory first position P9011. Alternatively, when the first character accessory 9061 stays at the second position P9012 of the first character accessory, the display of the decorative character of "Super Reach!" Is completed, and then the first character accessory 9061 is the first character. The character may be moved to the first position P9011. In this way, the player is made to recognize that the reach mode has evolved from the normal reach effect to the super reach effect. After that, as shown in FIG. 46 (F), the image display device 905 executes a super reach effect.

In addition, the "first character" may be determined in the character character character effect effect determination process (step S90501) at the time of super reach development, and "no execution" may be determined in the button image display determination process (step S90502) at the time of super reach development. .. In this case, the image display device 905 displays the image in the normal reach state shown in FIG. 45 (B). Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 46 (D-2), the first character accessory 9061 is the first character accessory first without displaying the button image 90201 or the controller image 90203 on the image display device 905. The first character accessory movement effect of moving from the position P9011 to the first character accessory second position P9012 is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 46 (E-2), the operation of moving the first character accessory 9061 from the first character accessory second position P9012 to the first character accessory first position P9011 is performed. In addition, the decorative characters "Super Reach!" Are displayed in the center of the image display device 905. In this way, the player is made to recognize that the reach mode has evolved from the normal reach effect to the super reach effect.

Further, in the button image display determination process (step S90502) at the time of super reach development, "with character" was determined, and in the super reach development character character effect effect determination process (step S90501), the "second character" was determined. In the case, it becomes as follows. First, as shown in FIG. 45 (B), the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 905L and the right decorative symbol display area 905R of the image display device 905, and the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state. , "Reach!" Decorative characters are displayed, and the normal reach effect is executed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 47 (C-3), the button image 90201 and the validity period bar 90202 are displayed in the center of the image display device 905, and the second character image 90212 is displayed. At this time, the validity period bar 90202 is displayed in red. Here, the size of the button image 90201 displayed together with the second character image 90212 is the same as the size of the button image 90201 displayed together with the first character image 90211 as shown in FIG. 45 (C-2).

By displaying the second character image 90212 in this way, it is suggested that the second character accessory movement effect in which the second character accessory 9062 operates is executed, and the jackpot expectation is high. Is made to recognize the player, and the expectation for the big hit is raised. The expected jackpot when the second character accessory motion effect is executed is lower than the jackpot expectation when the first character accessory motion effect is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47 (C-3), the expectation for the jackpot is higher than that in the case where the second character image 90212 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 45 (C-2). It is higher when the image 90211 is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 47 (C-3) and 47 (C-4), when the button image 90201, the second character image 90212, and the third character image 90213 are displayed, the second character image 90212 or the third character is displayed. Although the image 90213 displays the mode in which the button image 90201 is brought in, other modes may be displayed. For example, the button image 90201 may be displayed and at the same time the second character image 90212 or the third character image 90213 may be simply displayed, or the button image 90201 may be displayed and the second character image may be displayed after a short period of validity. 90212 or the third character image 90213 may be displayed. Further, a plurality of these display modes may be provided and displayed in various modes (patterns).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 45 (C-2) and 47 (C-3) (C-4), the first character image 90211 to the third character image 90213 are displayed side by side with the button image 90201. However, it may be displayed in other embodiments. For example, any of the first character image to the third character image may be drawn on the button image, or the button image itself may be any one of the first character accessory 9061 to the third character accessory 9063. The image may be imitated.

Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (D-3), the second character accessory 9062 moves from the second character accessory first position P9021 shown in FIG. 34 to the second character accessory second position P9022. Executes the character character movement effect. Further, in the image display device 905, the button image 90201, the validity period bar, and the second character image 90212 are erased, and the second character accessory 9062 is placed behind the second character accessory second position P9022. An effect image 90222 that stands out is displayed. The effect image 90222 corresponds to the second character accessory 9062 and is displayed behind the second character accessory 9062 to make the second character accessory 9062 stand out.

Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (E-3), the operation of moving the second character accessory 9062 from the second character accessory second position P9022 to the second character accessory first position P9021 is performed. In addition, the decorative characters "Super Reach!" Are displayed in the center of the image display device 905. In this way, the player is made to recognize that the reach mode has evolved from the normal reach effect to the super reach effect. After that, as shown in FIG. 46 (F), the image display device 905 executes a super reach effect.

Further, in the button image display determination process (step S90502) at the time of super reach development, "with character" was determined, and in the super reach development character character effect effect determination process (step S90501), the "third character" was determined. In the case, it becomes as follows. First, as shown in FIG. 45 (B), the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 905L and the right decorative symbol display area 905R of the image display device 905, and the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state. , "Reach!" Decorative characters are displayed, and the normal reach effect is executed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 47 (C-4), the button image 90201 and the validity period bar 90202 are displayed in the center of the image display device 905, and the third character image 90213 is displayed. At this time, the validity period bar 90202 is displayed in green. Here, the size of the button image 90201 displayed together with the third character image 90213 is the same as the size of the button image 90201 displayed together with the first character image 90211 as shown in FIG. 45 (C-2).

By displaying the third character image 90213 in this way, it is suggested that the third character accessory movement effect in which the third character accessory 9063 operates is executed, and the jackpot expectation is high. Is made to recognize the player, and the expectation for the big hit is raised. The expected jackpot when the third character accessory motion effect is executed is lower than the jackpot expectation when the second character accessory motion effect is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47 (C-4), the expectation for the big hit is higher than that when the third character image 90213 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 47 (C-3). It is higher when the image 90212 is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 47 (C-4), the expectation for the jackpot is higher than that in the case where the third character image 90213 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 45 (C-2). It is higher when 90211 is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (D-4), the third character accessory 9063 moves from the first position P9031 of the third character accessory shown in FIG. 34 to the second position P9032 of the third character accessory. Executes the character character movement effect. Further, in the image display device 905, the button image 90201, the validity period bar, and the third character image 90213 are erased, and the third character accessory 9063 is placed behind the third character accessory second position P9032. An effect image 90222 that stands out is displayed. The effect image 90222 corresponds to the third character accessory 9063 and is displayed behind the third character accessory 9063 to make the third character accessory 9063 stand out.

As shown in FIGS. 46 (D-2) and 47 (D-3) (D-4), the effect image 90222 displayed behind the first character accessory 9061 to the third character accessory 9063 is , The images are common, but different images may be used. For example, as the effect image, the image of each character corresponding to the first character accessory 9061 to the third character accessory 9063 may be displayed, or the image of the item associated with each character may be displayed. Good.

Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (E-4), the operation of moving the third character accessory 9063 from the third character accessory second position P9032 to the third character accessory first position P9031 is performed. In addition, the decorative characters "Super Reach!" Are displayed in the center of the image display device 905. In this way, the player is made to recognize that the reach mode has evolved from the normal reach effect to the super reach effect. After that, as shown in FIG. 46 (F), the image display device 905 executes a super reach effect.

Next, the character character effect at the time of the big hit result notification will be described. Both FIGS. 48 and 49 are diagrams for explaining the flow of the character accessory effect at the time of notifying the jackpot result. As the super reach effect progresses and the final stage is entered, as shown in FIG. 48 (A), the decorative characters "game!" Are displayed on the image display device 905.

Subsequently, for example, when the "button image" is determined in the image display determination process (step S90503) at the time of jackpot result notification shown in FIG. 43, as shown in FIG. 48 (B-1), the image display device 905 The button image 90201 and the validity period bar 90202 are displayed in the center. When the "controller image" is determined in the image display determination process (step S90503) at the time of jackpot result notification, the controller image is in the center of the image display device 905 as shown in FIG. 48 (B-2). 90203 and the validity period bar 90202 are displayed.

Further, after the effect shown in FIG. 48 (B-1), when the effect control board 9012 accepts the operation of the push button 9031B within the operation valid period, or when the operation valid period elapses, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the effect control CPU 90120. As shown in (C), the first character accessory motion effect is performed in which the first character accessory 9061 moves from the first character accessory first position P9011 to the first character accessory second position P9012. At the same time as this operation, the effect control CPU 90120 has the second character accessory 9062 and the third character accessory 9063 as the second character from the second character accessory first position P9021 and the third character accessory first position P9031 respectively. The second character accessory motion effect and the third character accessory motion effect that move to the second position P9022 and the third character accessory second position P9032 are performed. Further, in the image display device 905, the button image 90201 and the validity period bar 90202 are erased, and the first character combination is behind the first character accessory second position P9012 to the third character accessory second position P9032. The effect image 90222 that makes the object 9061 to the third character accessory 9063 stand out is displayed.

After the first character accessory motion effect, the second character accessory motion effect, and the third character accessory motion effect are executed, the first character accessory second position P9012, the second character accessory second position P9022, At the second position P9032 of the third character accessory, the first character accessory rotation effect to the third character accessory rotation effect in which the first character accessory 9061 to the third character accessory 9063 rotate (rotate) are executed. To. By executing the first character accessory rotation effect to the third character accessory rotation effect in this way, the expectation for the big hit is further increased.

Subsequently, one of the effects shown in FIGS. 48 (D-1) and 49 (D-2) is executed. Note that FIGS. 49 (A) to 49 (C) show the same steps as in FIGS. 48 (A) to 48 (C). In both FIGS. 48 (D-1) and 49 (D-2), the first character accessory 9061 to the third character accessory 9063 stop rotating, and the first character accessory rotation effect to the third character combination After the object rotation effect is completed, the first character accessory operation effect is executed in which the first character accessory 9061 moves from the first character accessory second position P9012 to the first character accessory first position P9011. Further, the second character accessory 9062 and the third character accessory 9063 are the second character accessory second position P9022 and the third character accessory second position P9032 to the second character accessory first position P9021 and the third, respectively. The second character accessory motion effect and the third character accessory motion effect that move to the first character accessory position P9031 are executed.

Then, for example, in the image display determination process (step S90503) at the time of jackpot result notification shown in FIG. 43, when the determination is made based on the fluctuation pattern PA3'-3, as shown in FIG. 48 (D-1), Along with the first character image 90211, the decorative character of "WIN" is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 48 (E-1), the jackpot combination in which the same decorative symbol "7" is aligned in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R is stopped and displayed. In this way, the fixed decorative symbol that is a big hit combination is derived and displayed on the image display device 905.

Further, for example, in the image display determination process (step S90503) at the time of jackpot result notification shown in FIG. 43, when the determination is made based on the fluctuation pattern PA2'-3, as shown in FIG. 49 (D-2), Along with the enemy character image 90224, the decorative character of "LOSE" is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 49 (E-2), different decorative symbols "7", "6", and "7" are aligned and stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, respectively. In this way, the definite decorative symbol, which is a combination of outlier symbols other than the jackpot combination, is derived and displayed on the image display device 905.

When the variable display result is a "big hit", as shown in FIGS. 48 (C) and 49 (C), the first to third character accessory movement effects are executed, and FIG. 48 (D-) As shown in 1), the decorative characters of "WIN" are displayed together with the first character image 90211. If the variable display result is "missing", the first to third character character character operation effects are produced. May not be done. When the variable display result is "missing", the first character accessory 9061 to the third character accessory 9063 do not move, or the first to third character combinations shown in FIGS. 48 (C) and 49 (C). Instead of the object movement effect, an effect dedicated to loss may be performed. As the effect dedicated to loss here, when the effect control board 9012 accepts the operation of the push button 9031B within the operation valid period, or when the operation valid period elapses, the first character accessory 9061 to the third character accessory The 9063 moves slightly at the first position P9011 to the third character accessory first position P9031, respectively, but moves from the first character accessory second position P9012 to the third character accessory second position P9032. You may try to perform an operation that does not.

Further, the image including the decorative character of "WIN" shown in FIG. 48 (D-1) and the image including the decorative character of "LOSE" shown in FIG. 49 (D-2) are the first character characters 9061 to 3rd. The display may be started after the character accessory 9063 moves (saves) to the first character accessory first position P9011 to the third character accessory first position P9031, respectively, or the first character accessory 9061 to The display may be started while the third character accessory 9063 is moving from the first character accessory first position P9011 to the third character accessory first position P9031 respectively. Alternatively, when the first character accessory 9061 to the third character accessory 9063 stay at the first character accessory second position P9012 to the third character accessory second position P9032, respectively, "WIN" or "LOSE" is selected. The display of the including image may be completed, and then the first character accessory may be moved to the first position P9011 to the third character accessory first position P9031.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 901 of the above-described embodiment, the first character accessory operation effect for operating the first character accessory 9061 and the first character accessory operation effect are different from the second character accessory operation effect. It is possible to execute the second character accessory movement effect that operates the character accessory 9062. Further, as shown in FIG. 45 (C-2), an effect in which the first character image 90211 suggesting the first character accessory operation effect is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 47 (C-3), a second character image is displayed. It is said that the effect of displaying the second character image 90212 suggesting the character accessory operation effect can be executed. For this reason, since the suggestion that a specific effect is to be performed is executed, the expectation for the execution of the effect can be increased, and the interest can be improved.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 901, in addition to the first character accessory movement effect for operating the first character accessory 9061 and the second character accessory operation effect for operating the second character accessory 9062, the third character It is said that the third character character movement effect that operates the character 9063 can be executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 47 (C-4), it is possible to execute an effect in which the third character image 90213, which suggests the third character accessory operation effect, is displayed. For this reason, in addition to diversifying the production, the diversified production, here, the third character character character motion production, also suggests that the production will be performed, so that the expectation for the execution of the production is high. It can be done and the interest can be improved.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 901, the first character accessory 9061 is capable of executing the first character accessory motion effect and the first character accessory rotation effect different from the first character accessory motion effect. There is. Further, when the first character accessory motion effect is executed, the first character image 90211 can be executed. Therefore, by displaying the first character image 90211, it is possible to raise the expectation for the first character accessory motion effect, and it is possible to improve the interest. Further, when the first character image 90211 is displayed, the first character accessory operation effect and the first character accessory rotation effect can also be executed. Therefore, when the first character image 90211 is displayed, it is possible to give an expectation for the execution of the first character accessory rotation effect in addition to the expectation for the execution of the first character accessory operation effect. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 901, the push sensor 9035B and the controller sensor unit 9035A can detect the operation of the player on the push button 9031B and the stick controller 9031A, and the display of the button image 90201 or the controller image 90203 is a push. This is a display that encourages the player to operate the button 9031B and the stick controller 9031A. Therefore, since the operating means to be operated can be taught to the player, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the interest. In FIGS. 48 (B-1) and (C-1) of the above-mentioned pachinko game machine 901, the button image 90201 or the controller image 90203 is displayed without being accompanied by the first character image 90211 or the second character image 90212. However, it may be displayed with the first character image 90211 and the second character image 90212. Further, the controller image 90203 may be displayed at a timing other than the jackpot result notification, for example, when the super reach is developed. Further, when the operating means corresponding to the displayed image is operated, the detecting means may detect the operation, or when an operating means other than the operating means corresponding to the displayed image is operated. Also, the detection means may detect the operation. For example, when the button image 90201 is displayed, the push sensor 9035B detects the operation of the push button 9031B, but the controller sensor unit 9035A does not have to detect the operation of the stick controller 9031A, and the button image 90201 When displayed, the push sensor 9035B may detect the operation of the push button 9031B, and the controller sensor unit 9035A may detect the operation of the stick controller 9031A.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 901, when the first character accessory motion effect is executed, the second character image 90212 and the third character image 90213 are not displayed before that. For this reason, each character's character character motion effect and each character image have a one-to-one correspondence relationship, and the effect to be executed is less likely to be confused. You can concentrate on the person and enjoy the production. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 901, the validity period bar 90202 indicating the operation validity period in which the effect control board 9012 accepts the operation of the push button 9031B and the stick controller 9031A is displayed, and the validity period bar 90202 is the first character. It is different when it is displayed together with the image 90211 and when it is displayed together with the second character image 90212. Specifically, the validity period bar 90202 is displayed in green when it is displayed together with the first character image 90211 and in red when it is displayed together with the second character image 90212. Therefore, since the valid period bar 90202 can also be focused on, it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1, the first character accessory motion effect related to the first character among the plurality of characters of the first character to the third character and the second character accessory related to the second character It is possible to perform motion effects. Further, when the first character accessory motion effect is executed, the first character image 90211 related to the first character is displayed, and when the second character accessory motion effect is executed, the second character is displayed. The second character image 90212 related to is displayed. For this reason, it is possible to perform an effect using a plurality of characters, so that it is possible to improve the interest. In the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 901, three characters, the first character to the third character, are used, but a fourth character, a fifth character, and the like may be provided and four or more characters may be used. ..

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 901, the image in the normal reach state shown in FIG. 45 (B) is displayed on the image display device 905, and subsequently, even if the button image 90201 and the controller image 90203 are not displayed, FIG. 46 As shown in (D-2), the first character accessory operation effect for operating the first character accessory 9061 may be executed. Therefore, even if the button image 90201 and the controller image 90203 are not displayed, the expectation for the character accessory movement effect can be maintained. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game production.

In addition, for example, the jackpot expectation when the first character bonus action effect to the third character bonus effect are executed may be increased in the following order (big hit expectation: 1.> 2. >3.>4.>5.> 6.).
1. 1. First character accessory movement effect after the character image and button image are displayed 2. First character character movement effect after only the button image is displayed 3. 2. Second character accessory movement effect after the character image and button image are displayed. 2. Second character character movement effect after only the button image is displayed. 3. Operation effect of the third character character after the character image and the button image are displayed. 3rd character character movement effect after only the button image is displayed

Further, in the above example, when the third character character character effect effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is lower than when the first character character character effect or the second character character character effect is executed. There is a concern that people's attention will be low. Therefore, when the third character image is displayed, the third character accessory motion effect may be different from the first character accessory motion effect and the second character accessory motion effect. Alternatively, when the third character image is displayed, a character accessory effect in which all of the first character accessory 9061 to the third character accessory 9063 operate may be executed by a subsequent button operation.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 901 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above-described embodiment, and a part described in the above-described embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have the structure of.

(Modification 1) In the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 901, neither the button image 90201 nor the controller image 90203 is displayed at the time of super reach development or big hit result notification, but at the time of super reach development or big hit result notification. In, both the button image 90201 and the controller image 90203 may be displayed at different times. For example, when the effect control board 9012 accepts the operation of the stick controller 9031A, the button image 90201 is displayed during the non-valid period before the operation of the stick controller 9031A is accepted, and then when the valid period is started. The controller image 90203 may be displayed. At this time, after the button image 90201 is displayed, the button image 90201 may be changed to the controller image 90203.

Further, when the button image 90201 is changed to the controller image 90203, the valid period bar 90202 is displayed after the controller image 90203 is displayed without displaying the valid period bar 90202 while the button image 90201 is displayed. You may try to do it. Further, when the button image 90201 is displayed during the non-valid period, although the button image 90201 is displayed as a dedicated display during the non-valid period, an image indicating the non-valid period may be displayed. Good. For example, a regulation line may be displayed on the button image 90201 to indicate that the push button operation is not valid.

Further, the effect control board 9012 may accept the operation of either the push button 9031B or the stick controller 9031A after the non-valid period. In this case, after displaying the button image 90201 during the non-valid period, if the operation of the push button 9031B is accepted when the valid period is reached, the display of the button image 90201 is continued and the operation of the stick controller 9031A is performed. When accepting, the button image 90201 may be changed to the controller image 90203 and displayed. In this case, since there is a possibility of shifting from the state in which the operation of the push button 9031B is accepted to the state in which the operation of the stick controller 9031A is accepted, the player can maintain the expectation that the jackpot expectation is increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, in the process of changing the button image 90201 to the controller image 90203, an action effect acting on the button image 90201 may be performed, and the button image 90201 and the controller image 90203 may be changed stepwise. For example, the color of the button image 90201 changes from white to red as the first step (“button (white)” → “button (red)”), and the button image 90201 changes to a large size as the second step (“button (white)” → “button (red)”). (Red) ”→“ Button (Large) ”), the controller image 90203 may be changed in the third stage (“Button (Red)” → “Controller”). Alternatively, the same change is made up to the third stage, the button image changes to a small controller image 90203 in the third stage (“button (red)” → “controller (small)”), and then the controller in the fourth stage. The image 90203 may be changed to a normal size (“controller (small)” → “controller”). Such stepwise changes may be made in the button image 90201, in the controller image 90203, or in the button image 90201 and the controller image 90203. Further, in performing the action effect, a pattern in which the button image 90201 changes to the controller image 90203 and a pattern in which the controller image 90203 does not change in the process of gradually changing the button image 90201 and returns to the button image 90201 are executed. It may be possible. Alternatively, the button image 90201 and the controller image 90203 may be displayed lightly and alternately to fuel the change to the controller image 90203. Further, when a stepwise change is performed in the controller image 90203 after the change from the button image 90201, the step before the change to the final form of the controller image 90203, for example, the above-mentioned "controller (small)" At the stage, there may be a change mode in which the controller image 90203 does not change and returns to the button image 90201, or when the stage reaches the "controller (small)" stage, the stage may proceed to the "controller" stage. Good. In this case, the change of the button image 90201 to the controller image 90203 can be interesting.

(Modification 2) Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the character accessory production, the character accessory can operate between the character accessory first position and the character accessory second position. The operating position of the character accessory third position or higher may be set so that the character accessory can be moved between the three or higher positions. Further, as the character accessory effect, only the character accessory motion effect and the character accessory rotation effect are set, but other forms of effect may be provided. For example, an effect such as tilting, swinging, enlarging, or deforming the character accessory may be provided. Further, a plurality of characters may be integrated to form different characters. In addition, a motif other than the character may be used for the specific effect. For example, it may be an effect using a plate on which characters are written or a gimmick that imitates a rock. Further, although the character accessory rotation effect is executed at the character accessory second position, it may be executed at a position other than the character accessory second position, for example, the character accessory first position.

(Modification 3) Further, in the above embodiment, the so-called big hit confirmation effect that is executed when a big hit is made in the special figure game is not provided, and the special figure regardless of which character effect is executed. Although the result of the game may be out of order, a so-called jackpot confirmation effect may be provided. For example, in the special figure game in which the first character accessory rotation effect is the jackpot confirmation effect and the first character accessory rotation effect is executed, the jackpot may always be achieved. Further, when the predetermined conditions are met, the big hit confirmation effect may be performed. For example, at the time of super reach development, when the first character accessory movement effect is executed after the first character image 90211 is displayed, the jackpot confirmation effect may be set.

(Modification 4) Further, in the above embodiment, the character character effect may be developed into a super reach without being executed, but when the character character effect is developed, the character character effect is always developed. It may be executed. In addition, when developing into super reach, in principle, the character character effect is executed, but when the effect that develops into super reach is executed without executing the character character effect, a special figure is drawn. The effect that becomes a big hit in the game and develops into a super reach without executing the character character effect may be a big hit confirmed effect. Also, if the character character effect is executed at the end of normal reach (when the super reach develops), it will always develop into super reach, but even if the character character effect is executed at the end of normal reach, it will not shift to super reach. It may be. At this time, if the character character effect is not executed and develops into super reach, the jackpot expectation may be higher than when the character character effect is executed and develops into super reach. , May be lowered. In addition, in the character character production at the time of super reach development, in the same character character production, the higher the determination ratio at the time of big hit (variation pattern PA3'-3 o'clock), the more the time of loss (variation pattern PA2'-3 o'clock). The decision rate is low, but other embodiments may be used. For example, the higher the determination rate at the time of big hit (variation pattern PA3'-3 o'clock), the higher the determination rate at the time of loss (variation pattern PA2'-3 o'clock), or at the time of big hit (variation pattern PA3'-). The determination ratio at the time of loss (variation pattern PA2'-3 o'clock) may be constant regardless of the determination ratio at the time of 3 o'clock).

(Modification 5) Further, in the above embodiment, the ratio at which the button image 90201 is displayed and the operation of the push button 9031B is accepted at the time of super reach development and the jackpot result notification is the type of character character effect effect. It is constant regardless of, but may be different depending on the type of character character effect. For example, when the first character accessory motion effect is executed, the ratio of displaying the button image 90201 and accepting the operation of the push button 9031B is higher than when the second character accessory motion effect is executed. It may be. Similarly, the reception of the operation of the controller image 90203 and the stick controller 9031A may be different depending on the type of the character accessory effect.

(Modification 6) Further, in the above-described embodiment, the character image displayed on the image display device 905 and the character character character effect to be executed match the characters, but the characters do not match. It may be one. For example, the second character image 90212 and the third character image 90213 may be displayed before the effect of operating the first character accessory 9061 such as the first character accessory operation effect is executed. In this case, the player can be surprised, and the interest can be improved, which is different from the case where the first character image 90211 is displayed. Further, when the characters do not match between the character image displayed on the image display device 905 and the character accessory effect to be executed, the jackpot expectation may be higher than when the characters match. , May be lowered. Further, depending on the relationship between the character image displayed on the image display device 905 and the character character effect to be executed, the jackpot confirmation effect may be achieved. For example, the effect in which the second character accessory operation effect is executed after the third character image is displayed may be the jackpot confirmation effect.

(Modification 7) Further, in the above embodiment, the display mode of the button image 90201 and the controller image 90203 is constant, but the button image 90201 and the controller image 90203 may be displayed in different modes. .. For example, as the button image, a button image larger than the normal button image 90201 shown in FIG. 45 or the like, or a character different from "CHANGE", for example, "this" may be displayed. By displaying such a button image, the jackpot expectation may change, for example, to be higher.

(Modification 8) Further, when the controller image 90203 is displayed on the button image 90201, a voice may be emitted or characters for explanation may be displayed. For example, when the button image 90201 is displayed, a voice prompting the operation of the push button 9031B such as "press" or "press the button" may be emitted. In this case, for example, when the first character image 90211 or the second character image 90212 is displayed, the sound of the first character or the second character may be emitted. In addition, voices of different characters and other voices may be generated. Further, the jackpot expectation may be different depending on the presence or absence of voice. For example, the jackpot expectation may be higher when there is voice than when there is no voice.

(Modification 9) Further, in the above embodiment, the character accessory effect may not be executed even when the button image 90201 is displayed, but when the button image 90201 or the controller image 90203 is displayed, the character accessory effect may not be executed. , The character character effect may be executed without fail. Further, the character accessory effect may be executed even when the button image 90201 or the controller image 90203 is not displayed, but when the button image 90201 or the controller image 90203 is not displayed, the character accessory effect is not executed. You may.

(Modification 10) Further, in the above embodiment, when the button image 90201 is displayed at the end of normal reach (at the time of development of super reach), it always develops into super reach thereafter, but at the end of normal reach. Even if the button image 90201 is displayed, it may not develop into super reach. Alternatively, when the button image 90201 and the character image are displayed at the end of the normal reach, it always develops into super reach, but the button image 90201 alone may not develop into super reach. Further, when the character character character effect is executed without displaying the button image 90201, even if the jackpot expectation is higher than when the button image 90201 is displayed and the character character effect is executed. It may be low or it may be low. Further, when the character accessory effect is not executed, the button image 90201 without the character image may be displayed without fail. For example, when a button operation effect other than the development to the character character effect is performed, the button image 90201 without the character image is displayed, or the so-called ghost effect is not executed by the operation of the push button 9031B. It is possible to do so, and when this ghost effect is executed, the button image 90201 without the character image may be displayed without fail.

(Modification 11) Further, in the above embodiment, the character character effect may not be executed even when the character image is displayed, but when the character image is displayed, the character character effect is performed. It may be executed without fail. Further, when the super reach is developed, the button image 90201 may be displayed, but the controller image may be displayed so that the operation of the stick controller can be accepted. Further, the character character rotation effect is executed only when the jackpot result is notified, but may be executed when the super reach is developed. Further, the character accessory rotation effect is executed by all of the first character accessory 9061 to the third character accessory 9063, but only a part thereof may be executed. Further, the jackpot expectation may be changed depending on the number and types of character characters for which the character character effect is executed.

(Modification 12) Further, in the above embodiment, as the character image, one type of first character image 9021 to 3rd character image 90213 is provided for each of the first character to the third character. , A plurality of types of character images may be provided for a part or all of each character. In this case, the jackpot expectation may differ depending on the displayed character image, or the execution rate of the character character effect may differ. For example, when the first character image A and the first character image B are provided as the first character image, when the first character image A is displayed, it is a big hit than when the first character image B is displayed. Expectations may be high. Alternatively, when the first character image A is displayed, the rate at which the character accessory effect is executed may be higher than when the first character image B is displayed. Alternatively, when a plurality of character character effects having different jackpot expectations are provided, when the first character image A is displayed, a character having a higher jackpot expectation than when the first character image B is displayed. The ratio of the character production may be increased. Further, even if a character character effect having a high expectation of a big hit is provided, which can be executed only when the first character image A is displayed and is not executed when the first character image B is displayed. Good.

(Modification 13) Further, in the above embodiment, when the controller image 90203 is displayed at the time of the jackpot result notification, the character image is not displayed, but the character image is displayed together with the controller image 90203. May be good. Further, when displaying the character image, any one of the first character image 90211 to the third character image 90213 is displayed, but a plurality of the first character image 90211 to the third character image 90213 are displayed. A character image may be displayed.

(Modification 14) Further, when displaying a character image when displaying the button image 90201 or the controller image 90203, the jackpot expectation may be changed depending on the type of the displayed character image. Further, the jackpot expectation may be changed by combining the character image and the button image 90201 or the controller image 90203. For example, when the second character image 90212 and the button image 90201 are displayed, the jackpot expectation is lower than when the second character image 90212 and the controller image 90203 are displayed, but the third character image 90213 and the button image are displayed. When 90201 is displayed, the jackpot expectation may be higher than when the third character image 90213 and the controller image 90203 are displayed.

(Modification 15) Further, in the above embodiment, the validity period bar 90202 is displayed in a different manner depending on the type of the character image displayed at the same time, but it may be displayed in the same manner. Further, although some character images have the same mode, the other character images may have different modes. Further, the display mode of the validity period bar may be a mode other than changing the color. For example, the validity period bar may have a different pattern, or the size of the validity period bar displayed may be changed. Specifically, the validity period bar 90202 displayed together with the first character image 90211 has a floral pattern, whereas the validity period bar 90202 displayed together with the second character image 90212 has a checkered pattern or is the first. The validity period bar 90202 displayed together with the character image 90211 may be larger than the validity period bar 90202 displayed together with the second character image 90212. Further, the display positions may be different positions, or the display direction may be changed. For example, the validity period bar 90202 displayed together with the first character image 90211 is displayed below the image display device 905, whereas the validity period bar 90202 displayed together with the second character image 90212 is displayed on the image display device 905. The validity period bar 90202 displayed upward or displayed together with the first character image 90211 is displayed vertically, whereas the validity period bar 90202 displayed together with the second character image 90212 is displayed horizontally. It may be displayed. Alternatively, these may be combined. For example, the validity period bar 90202 displayed together with the first character image 90211 has a grid pattern and is displayed vertically, whereas the validity period bar 90202 displayed together with the second character image 90212 has a floral pattern. Yes, and may be displayed sideways.

(Modification 16) Further, in the above-described embodiment, the display mode of the validity period bar 90202 is constant depending on the character image, but the same character image may be displayed in a different mode. In this case, the jackpot expectation may be changed depending on the display mode of the validity period bar 90202. For example, when the first character image 90211 is displayed, the jackpot expectation may be higher when the validity period bar 90202 is displayed in red than when it is displayed in green. Further, the jackpot expectation may be changed depending on the display mode of the character image and the validity period bar 90202. For example, when the first character image 90211 is displayed, the jackpot expectation is higher when the validity period bar 90202 is displayed in red than when it is displayed in green, but the second character image 90212 is displayed. In such a case, the jackpot expectation may be lower when the validity period bar 90202 is displayed in red than when it is displayed in green.

(Modification 17) Further, the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine may have a so-called customization function. The customization function here may be, for example, a function capable of selecting a character to be the main character when a variable display game is executed. With such a customization function, when the player selects the first character as the main character, the first character character effect may be easily executed. Alternatively, the jackpot expectation may be increased when the first character appears or when the effect of operating the first character accessory is executed. Alternatively, the first character image may be easily displayed together with the second character image and the third character image. Further, when the voice of the character is emitted, the voice of the first character may be easily emitted.

(Modification 18) In the above embodiment, when variable display is started in order to notify the effect control CPU 90120 of a variable display time indicating a variable display mode such as a variable display time of a decorative symbol and a type of reach effect. Although an example of transmitting one variation pattern designation command is shown in the above, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control CPU 90120 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, in the game control microcomputer 90100, as the first command, the presence or absence of variable display effects such as "slip" and "pseudo-ream", etc., are variable before reaching. A command indicating the display time and the variable display mode is transmitted, and as a second command, a command indicating the variable display time and the variable display mode after the reach, such as the type of reach and the presence or absence of the re-lottery effect, is transmitted. You may do so. In this case, the effect control CPU 90120 may perform effect control in the variable display based on the variable display time derived from the two commands. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 90100 notifies the variable display time by each of the two commands, and the effect control CPU 90120 selects the specific variable display mode to be executed at each timing. It may be. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, or the second command is sent after a predetermined time has passed after the first command is sent. You may try to do it. Further, the variable display mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data to be stored and prepared in advance as the fluctuation pattern designation command.

(Modification 19) The present invention can be applied not only to pachinko gaming machines 901 but also to slot machines and the like. A slot machine is an arbitrary game machine capable of performing a predetermined game such as a variable display of a symbol serving as a plurality of types of identification information and imparting a predetermined game value based on the game result, and more specifically, the slot machine. By setting a predetermined number of bets for one game, the game can be started, and the display result of the variable display device that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each is derived and displayed. This is a gaming machine in which one game is completed and a prize can be generated according to the display result. In such a slot machine, the features of the pachinko gaming machine 901 shown in the above embodiment by the cooperation of the hardware resources including the image display device of the slot machine and the software that performs a predetermined process. It suffices that it is configured to include all or part of.

Slot machines are not limited to those in which the number of bets is set using medals and credits as the game value, but only slot machines that set the number of bets using game balls as the game value and credits as the game value. It may be a fully credited slot machine that sets the number of bets using. When using a game ball as a game medium, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls. For example, when setting 3 as the number of bets, 15 game balls are used for the number of bets. Corresponds to the one that sets. The pachinko game machine 901 and the slot machine are not limited to those using only one of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and game balls, and for example, a plurality of types such as medals and game balls. It may be one that can be used in combination with a gaming value. For example, a slot machine can set a bet number and play a game by using any of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, and can play medals and game balls by generating a prize. Any of a plurality of types of gaming values may be paid out.

As the effects that can be performed in such a slot machine, the character character effect (character character movement effect and character character rotation effect) in the above embodiment, the button image, the controller image, and the operation of the push button, the stick controller, etc. are displayed. It suffices if a promotion display or the like for promoting the above is included.

(Modification 20) In addition, an image display operation in an image display device for executing a predetermined effect such as a device configuration and a data configuration of a game machine, a process shown in a flowchart, and a notice effect, an audio output operation in a speaker, and further. Various effect operations including the lighting operation of the game effect lamp and the decorative LED can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the game machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but is based on the generation of a prize ball by enclosing the game ball. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives a score.

(Modification 21) The program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 901 or a slot machine. The form is not limited to the form, and the form may be distributed by pre-installing it in a storage device such as a computer device in advance. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

(Modification 22) The game is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like are temporarily stored in an internal memory or the like. This may be a form in which execution is possible, or a form in which it is directly executed using the hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

(Modification 23) In the above embodiment, "different ratios" are limited to those having different ratios due to a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. Not limited to this, the concept includes those having different ratios due to a relationship such as A: B = 100%: 0%.

(Modification 24) In the above embodiment, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols and decorative symbols of "1" to "8" are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed is shown. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the variably displayed symbol and the derived symbol do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the variably displayed symbol may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol is derived and displayed at the end. It may be a thing.

(Modification 25) In the above embodiment, the update timing of each random number may be different, or the update range of each random number may be different so that the random numbers are not synchronized.

(Modification 26) In the above embodiment, a table for determining a random number value is stored in the main board 9011, and the main board 9011 determines the random value value based on the random number value extracted on the main board 9011 at the time of starting winning. An example in which the effect control board 9012 receives the determination result determined by the main board 9011 and executes the pre-reading advance notice effect based on the received determination result by referring to the table and executing the determination process of the random number value. As shown, the execution mode of the pre-reading notice effect is not limited to this. For example, the effect control board 9012 stores the table for determining the random number value, and the effect control board 9012 receives the random number value itself extracted from the main board 9011 from the main board 9011 and is based on the received random number value. The random value determination process may be executed with reference to the random value determination table, and the pre-reading advance notice effect may be executed based on the determination result of the determination process. That is, the random value determination process may be performed on the effect control board 9012. Further, the random value determination process may be performed on both the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. For example, the effect control board 9012 may receive a part of the random numbers and execute the random value determination process, and may also receive the determination result determined by the main board 9011. Specifically, for example, the effect control board 9012 receives a random number value and determines whether or not it will be a big hit, and if it is a big hit, it executes a determination of the type of big hit, and based on the random number value, the main board 9011 The determination result of the variation pattern type determined in is may be received. That is, the effect control board 9012 can execute the pre-reading advance notice effect based on the determination result determined by itself and the determination result determined by the main board 9011.

(Modification 27) In the above embodiment, on the side of the effect control board 9012, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 9011 is caused by turning on the effect control INT signal from the main board 9011. It was explained as occurring. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command may be generated by an interrupt request by the first bit of serial communication.

The present invention is suitably applied to a game machine capable of performing variable display.

1 Pachinko game machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 2nd special symbol display 9 effect display device 9a 1st reserved storage display 9b 2nd reserved storage display 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd starting winning opening 20 special Variable winning ball device 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 Game control microcomputer 80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU
109 VDP
130 Cross key 901 Pachinko game machine 902 Game board 903 Game machine frame 904A Special symbol display device 904B Special symbol display device 905 Image display device 906A Ordinary winning ball device 906B Ordinary variable winning ball device 907 Special variable winning ball device 908L 909 Game effect lamp 9011 Main board 9012 Production control board 9013 Voice control board 9014 Lamp control board 9015 Relay board 9020 Normal symbol display 9021 Gate switch 9022A Start port switch 9022B Start port switch 9023 Count switch 9025A Hold display 9025B Hold display 9025C Hold indicator 90100 Game control microcomputer 90101 ROM
90102 RAM
90103 CPU
90104 Random number circuit 90105 I / O
90110 Switch circuit 90111 Solenoid circuit 90120 CPU for effect control
90121 ROM
90122 RAM
90123 Display control unit 90124 Random number circuit 90125 I / O

Claims (1)

It is a game machine that can play a game and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Volume adjustment operation means for adjusting the volume,
Luminance adjustment operation means for performing brightness adjustment,
It is provided with an adjusting means capable of performing a process of adjusting the volume based on the operation of the volume adjusting operating means and a process of performing the brightness adjusting based on the operation of the brightness adjusting operating means.
The adjusting means preferentially executes the process of lowering the volume when both the operation of lowering the volume by the volume adjusting operating means and the operation of increasing the brightness by the brightness adjusting operating means are performed.
further,
A detection means that can detect the movement of the player,
It is provided with an effect executing means capable of executing a promotion display for prompting the player's action and executing a specific effect based on the detection result of the detection means.
The effect executing means is
Based on the detection result of the detection means while executing the promotion display, the promotion display can be terminated and the specific effect can be executed.
As the specific effect, at least the first specific effect related to the first character and the second specific effect related to the second character, which is different from the first specific effect, can be executed.
As the promotion display, a first promotion display including a first suggestion display suggesting the first character and a second promotion display including a second suggestion display suggesting the second character can be executed.
As a pattern for ending the promotion display and executing the specific effect,
A first pattern that performs the first specific effect along with executing the first accelerator displayed without terminates the first accelerator display performing said second accelerator display,
A second pattern that performs the second specific effect along with executing the second accelerator displayed without terminates the second accelerator display performing said first accelerator display,
Anda third pattern that performs the second specific effect along with executing the first accelerator displayed without terminates the first accelerator display performing said second accelerator display,
When the second specific effect is executed by the third pattern, the expectation that the second specific effect is controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the second specific effect is executed by the second pattern.
A game machine characterized by that.